Home

User's Guide - Allied Telesis

1. 104 Configuring the Syslog Client 2 rep Pt C ORE D Vix dip a DO Mi 105 MOTUS IC 105 Web BrOWSBF eret etd o REEF RE m ERU ER ro 105 Configuring the 10 1TO00Base T X Port 2 i ied ete e t ed etd e ite rede e ataoa eee 107 Mens 5t er tte tede cta de i tei b Was 107 Web re E PR 110 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Contents Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers sssssssseee eene nemen nennen errem nennen ener enne 167 Dc eeseete oe 167 Web Browser iio eto td dre ere cera eer bed e n EE EE ENDE REUS RR REPERI 168 Displaying SEP Module Information riisiin nii ee Pe hee esset ed de deca ee e ee ges see deed soe iiad iwi 170 aE E ETE A EH 170 Veb Bro SE a a aa T codecs ens a a guste fast aE a aa a A EEE EATA 172 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management annerer 173 Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Menus ssseseeee eene nennen nennen nnne nemen 174 Naming a Remote Line Gard cinere rentrer doti peni tere e ep arda knee ge nter adr a akku 179 Displaying the Current Configuration nemen nnne nennen rennen nene nennen tenere 180 Configuririg R
2. Figure 7 Dying Gasp Feature If the remote AT CV1203 Chassis has two AT CM Line Cards both cards transmit the signal from their fiber optic ports If the AT CV1203 Chassis has both a primary power supply and a redundant power supply the dying gasp feature can notify you if one power supply loses power It accomplishes this by sending the 1st RPS Failure signal This signal indicates that the remote chassis has lost power on one power supply but continues to operate with the remaining power supply To support this feature there has to be an AT CV5M02 Management Card installed in the remote chassis because only a management card can detect the loss of a single power supply when a chassis has two power supplies This feature is illustrated in Figure 8 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The remote AT CM Card The local AT CM Card sends 7 oe p E lt AT CM Line Card over the backplane The remote AT CV 1203 Chassis loses power on ux 2 R amp 2 The management card sends one power supply e the 1st failure signal to the sends the signal to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis the signal over the backplane to the management card Y ee Tee Jee hee re eb eo eo eo eo eo eo eo eo eo Sg E al j is ee The managemen
3. 9 AT CV102 0 2 10 AT CV102 11 AT CV102 02 Nd AT CV102 20 c 20 22 22 9 To c2 P Figure 3 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu The corresponding window in the web browser windows has the same name as its menus peer and is used in much the same way To manage a remote AT CM Line Card from the window you select the card s local counterpart This redirects the session to the remote line card For more information on this window refer to Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Web Browser Windows on page 182 Local line cards in the managed chassis Remote line cards Remote Module Status amp Configuration Menu Vig Local Module Card Type Version Link A 1 AT CV5MO02 No Support Mo Support Mo Support 2 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 Online 3 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 Online 4 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 Online 5 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 Online Figure 4 Remote Module Status and Configuration Window For instructions on how to use this feature refer to Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management on page 173 49 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 50 Remote Updates of the AT S73 Management Soft
4. 15 Where to Find Web based Guides tees eite ede ded eee EL Pene etd sen tre Ie Pede adeo da Inde dde de eode c dne cu 16 Contacting Allied Telesis 2 9 ee eun eed tego tese te peso sd lect ii e ice Gade iat a a dod DR Redes 17 e lssiejero ME 17 Email nd Telephione S pport croce itti nn t patet ER Re antt ie Rta ponen pee o tat ipid rcx esed dtc vbet dde dest 17 Returning Produets EP 17 sales and Corporate Informations 5 1 trei Un erre sedi decease ddr decane ce cach xac eden stag aiaa ia aiia ea aariaid 17 li ucu EH 17 Management Software Updates ssssssssssssee eene nennen nennen enne en ernne nnne enn en ers r innen erret nennen 18 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card ssssssssssseeeeeene enne nennen en nere nennen eren nnne ens 19 The Converteon Product Line 2 2 tiec intor ite ite nee ive anA aeu Ende e e 2RR TL ERE Eu ek Po SPART ceiien dv aee rhe od ee uno 20 AT CV5M01 and AT CV5M02 Management Cards ssssssssssessee eene nennen nnne nennen nennen nene nennen nene 21 AT S99 Management Software kesing imc ee deat i i t diede MER ex b eii i Lee bed te aaa iiai 22 Console Port 5 se IR eite inet pe i be egeta eed tee ich Ua eed ene Eve ee v ee eee 22 10 100Base TX POrt eot eer RR ERE PR ARR ERE a RE ART RM NERA ed neret sacs 22 IP Address Gonfiguratlori 5 2 1 IS i ede coat ener eii quis peer senda P
5. 109 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 11 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Cards Setting Description Auto negotiate When configuring a port observe the following Manual negotiate guidelines in O If the network device connected to a line card port does not use Auto Negotiation and has a fixed duplex mode of full duplex disable Auto Negotiation on the port and set the speed and duplex mode manually to avoid a duplex mode mismatch Hundred Base lt 100Base TX gt Ten Base lt 10Base T gt Continued 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file go to the Main Menu and select Configuration to display the Configuration menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations Web Browser To configure the 10 100Base TX port on the management card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the management card Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the management card The Port A tab for the management card is shown in Figure 37 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Help General Port Port Status Configuration Slot Number 1 Module AT CV5MD2 Port Status Link Status Online Speed 10M Duplex Half 110 Figure 37 Port A Tab for the Management Card
6. 100 More S to Main Menu Ne Figure 48 Module Status and Configuration Menu The columns in the menu are described in Table 13 Table 13 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description MODULE INFO Mod Name This column lists the chassis slot numbers and the names of the AT CM Line Cards For instructions on how to assign names to the line cards refer to Assigning Names to AT CM Line Cards on page 149 The AT CV Line Cards do not support names CardTypeVer This column displays the model names of the management cards and the line cards in the chassis The model names of newer versions of the AT CM Line Cards have suffixes like v2 ST This column displays the states of the management cards and the line cards The possible states are D The line card is operating normally Oo The state which applies only to AT CM Line Cards indicates that the line card is initializing its management software 128 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 13 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description OperMode This column displays different information depending on the type of card For the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards this column displays the operating modes of the line cards For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 42 The possible modes are D LinkTest Link Test mode ML MissingLink mo
7. 100 More eo to Main Menu S Figure 19 Module Status and Configuration Menu 5 Select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure and press Return to display the Module Configuration Menu for the card Note If the line card is already set to the OAM visible mode go to step 11 Otherwise continue to the next step 6 Select Configure Operating Mode to display the Operating Mode Config Menu for the line card 7 From the Operating Mode Config Menu select OAM Visible Mode This confirmation prompt is displayed Warning Changing the Operation Mode will reset the line card Change Operation Mode now Yes or No 8 Type Y to continue or N to cancel the procedure This prompt is displayed If auto copy is enable operation mode change need to be saved to take affect Save line card configuration before rebooting Yes or NO 75 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session 76 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Type Y for yes to update the master configuration file on the management card with the new setting for the card s operating mode This step is especially important if the auto copy feature is activated on the card s slot If the card s operating mode isn t saved in the master configuration file the new setting will not take affect because the card after it resets will simply revert to its previous operating mode Since this is the initial
8. Column Description IPC Continued C This is the total number of responses the management card is waiting to receive from the AT CM Line Cards For AT CM Line Cards this column displays the following information 000 B C A This toggles to when the management card is sending a message to the line card in the slot B This toggles to when the management card is waiting to transmit a message to the line card C This displays the status of a line card s response to the last transmitted message from the management card A successful response is indicated by while a bad response or no response is signalled with o This column does not apply to the AT CV Line Cards AC This column displays the status of the auto copy feature for those chassis slots that contain AT CM Line Cards For background information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 The possible states are ON for No The auto copy feature is not enabled on the slot The AT CM Line Card uses its own configuration file to set its parameter settings C Y for Yes The auto copy feature is activated on the slot The configuration settings for the AT CM Line Card in the slot are provided by the management card from the master configuration file The AT CM70S Line Card and the AT CV Line Cards do not support the auto copy feature VER 130 This column displays the version numbers of the management softwa
9. Note Updating the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card interrupts the card s operations The card will be unresponsive for approximately two minutes while it downloads and initializes the new software Your management session ends To resume managing the unit you have to start a new management session A Caution Updating the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM Line Cards interrupts the cards network operations Some network traffic may be lost The line cards stop forwarding network traffic for approximately two minutes while they store and initialize the new software This procedure has the following requirements O The procedure has to be performed from a local management session using the menus For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 O You need to store the new management software programs on your computer or terminal used to perform the local management session To download new management software using XMODEM 1 From the Main Menu select Image Download to display the menu in Figure 126 on page 276 2 Select Image Download via XMODEM This displays the menu in Figure 127 279 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files d Image Download via XMODEM ES Management Card Image Download Single Local Line Card Image Single Local Line Card Bootloader Single Remote Line Card Image Single Remote Line Card Bootloader Return to Imag
10. 24 The management software has two accounts There is a manager account for viewing and configuring the parameter settings and an operator account for just viewing the settings The manager account has the username manager and the default password friend The operator account has the username operator and the default password operator The usernames and passwords are case sensitive For the instructions on changing the passwords refer to Configuring Management Security on page 90 To change to a different account after you ve started a management session you have to log out from your current session and log in again For example to configure the parameter settings of the line cards after logging on with the operator account you have to log out and log in again with the manager account Note A management card can support up to one manager session and ten operator sessions at a time AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Management Access Local Management Remote Telnet Management Remote Web Browser Management SNMP Management There are four ways to manage the Converteon product Local management Remote Telnet management m m O Remote web browser management Oo Remote SNMP management The AT CV5M02 Management Card has an RS 232 Console port for local out of band management This type of management has to be performed at the chassis hence the term local It is accompl
11. esee 287 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples c cccccecececceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeaeeeeseaaeaeeeeeesecaeeeeeseecqaeeeeeeeesuaeeeeess 291 SNMPv3 Configuration Examples isian dii dene cede eterne eee ede ede ted dene Ver dea im E red de desee daten dde ene 291 SNMPv3 Manager Configuration sess nennen enne e nnn enne nr nen nennen nene enne 291 SNMPv3 Operator Config ratioN ssis ncnia nennen enn EAEAN ENEE ETAN ren nennen nene enne nnns 293 SNMPvV3 Worksheet eruit d t RIDERE E MEER A ERN Adsneecessceersddaepageraeghaged 294 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card sse 297 la p E 317 Contents Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Card seen ene 32 Remote Peer Management Example
12. 4 Enter the new community strings in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields A community string can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted Community strings are case sensitive 5 Click Update 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and click Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Specifying the IP Addresses of SNMP Trap Receivers Menus Web Browser The management card can send SNMP traps to up to four trap receivers on your network The traps alert you to significant events in the operations of the Converteon chassis like the removal of line cards the failure of a cooling fan or the loss of a link on a port on a media converter line card The requirements for this feature are described in Access to Your Network on page 28 To specify the IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration This displays the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 22 on page 81 4 In the Manager Address fields enter the IP addresses of the trap receivers To remove an IP address enter 0 0 0
13. Diagnostics Total Events 11 Displaying 1 to 11 Date Time Message 04 17 08 11 15 17 REPORT 04 17 08 F if ia oiie lea REPORT 04 17 08 11 15 17 REPORT 04 17 08 abe pe Hoye le REPORT 04 17 08 11 15 18 REPORT 04 17 08 abbr linc i REPORT 04 17 08 11 15 35 REPORT Region22 Region21 Region21 Region21 Region22 Region21 Region22 Line Card 14 Port B Offline Line Card 11 Port A Offline Line Card 11 Port B Offline Copper port failure on remote linecard 11 Copper port failure on remote linecard 14 Line Card 11 Port A Online Line Card 14 Port A Online Figure 31 Event Log Tab 3 To clear all of the messages in the log click the Clear Event Log button at the bottom of the tab 103 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Viewing the Activity Monitor 104 Menus Web Browser The activity monitor displays the event messages in real time For background information refer to Activity Monitor on page 23 To view the activity monitor from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Start Activity Monitor 3 From the Administration Menu select Activity Monitor to display the monitor An example of the Activity Monitor is shown in Figure 32 The monitor displays the messages as they occur on the line cards in the chassis 7 04 17 08 04 1
14. The remote OAM client has rejected the OAM information from the local client Operation Status continued O OAM Peering Remotely Rejected The local OAM client has rejected the OAM information from the remote client O Operational The OAM client is in the operational state The AT CM Line Cards have to be in this state to support the OAM based features Mux State Displays the state of the multiplexer function which governs the flow of frames from the MAC client The possible values are o Forward Multiplexer passes MAC client frames to subordinate sublayer o Discard Multiplexer discards MAC client frames 216 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 26 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Parser State Indicates the state of the parser function in the OAM peer as reflected in the latest OAMPDU This value is changed based on loopback actions by either the local or remote station The possible values are o Forward Parser passes received non OAMPDUs to superior sublayer O Loopback Parser passes received non OAMPDUs to Multiplexer during remote loopback test o Discard Parser discards received non OAMPDUs Local Discovering Local Stable Indicates whether the local station can accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity 0 Yes Local station accepts the configuration of the peer OAM
15. AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 3 Click the Port Configuration tab shown in Figure 38 Menu View Chassis View General Port ort Status Configuration Slot Number 1 Port Configuration Negotiation Speed Duplex Module Status amp Configuration Help Module AT CV5MO02 Manual 10M Half Figure 38 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card To adjust the settings of the port click Edit to display the Port Configuration pop up window Adjust the parameters as needed The parameters are defined in Table 11 on page 109 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply 111 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Restoring the Default Setting on the 10 100Base TX Port 112 Menus Web Browser These procedures are used to restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card The procedures do not interrupt the network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis Note The 10 100Base TX port has a wiring configuration of MDI This is not adjustable To restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration 2 Select the AT CV
16. After you select this option a prompt is displayed for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Multiple Line Card Images by Card Type Select this option to upgrade the AT S73 Management Software on multiple local and remote AT CM Line Cards When you select this option the following prompt is displayed 1 AT CM2x2 2 AT CM2Kx 3 AT CM70x Enter card type group gt To update the AT S73 Management Software on the local or remote AT CM201 AT CM202 AT CM202 1 AT CM202 2 AT CM212A 1 and AT CM212B 1 Line Cards enter 1 to select AT CM2x2 All of these line cards use the same image file To update the management software on the AT CM2KOS Line Cards enter 2 for AT CM2Kx Finally to update the AT CM7OS Line Cards enter 3 for AT CM70x The following prompt is displayed 1 Local Line Cards Only 2 Remote Line Cards Only 3 Both Local and Remote Line Cards Enter card type group Use this prompt to specify whether you want to upgrade the local line cards of the selected card type the remote line cards or both Single Remote Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the AT S73 Management Software on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature After you select this option you are prompted for the slot number of the local line card that is connected to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one s
17. O Yes The OAM client responds to variable retrieval requests This is the default setting o No The OAM client does not respond to variable retrieval requests 56 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session This chapter has the following sections Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 Starting a Telnet Management Session on page 61 Starting a Web Browser Management Session on page 62 Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 69 D Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 74 u uuu 0 57 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session Starting a Local Management Session 58 This procedure explains how to start a local out of band management session using the RS 232 Console port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card does not need an IP address for local management Your initial management session has to be a local session The Console port on the management card requires a DEC VT100 or ANSI terminal or an equivalent terminal emulator program The large windows in the management software require a terminal or terminal emulator program that can support up to 125 characters per line To start a local management session 1 Connect one end of the management cable included with the management card to the Console port on the management card
18. The date and time are added by the management card to event messages and SNMP traps The date and time can be set manually or since the card has a Network Time Protocol NTP client from an NTP server on your network or the Internet If you choose to use the NTP client review the client s requirements in Access to Your Network on page 28 Note Since the management card does not maintain the date and time when reset or powered off the NTP client is the recommended method for setting this information To set the date and time From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 71 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Clock Configuration 4 To set the date and time manually do the following a Select System Date mm dd yy and enter a new date in the format mm dd yy format For example April 5 2008 would be 4 5 08 b Select System Time hh mm ss and enter a new time in 24 hour hh mm ss format The seconds are optional For example 8 15 am would be 08 15 5 To configure the NTP client do the following a Select NTP Server and enter the IP address of the NTP server b To enable the client select Enable NTP 6 Return to the Main Menu Naming the The management card will be easier to identify if you assign it a name Management The name is displayed at the top of the menus in
19. 2858 through 2886 2886 2887 through 2915 2915 2916 through 2945 2945 2946 through 2976 2976 2977 through 3007 3007 3008 through 3039 3039 3040 through 3072 3072 3073 through 3105 3105 3106 through 3139 3139 3140 through 3174 3174 3175 through 3210 3210 3211 through 3246 3246 3247 through 3284 3284 311 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 312 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 3285 through 3322 3322 3323 through 3361 3361 3362 through 3401 3401 3402 through 3442 3442 3443 through 3484 3844 3485 through 3527 3527 3528 through 3571 3571 3572 through 3616 3616 3617 through 3663 3663 3664 through 3710 3710 3711 through 3759 3759 3760 through 3809 3809 3810 through 3861 3861 3862 through 3913 3913 3914 through 3968 3968 3969 through 4024 4024 4025 through 4081 4081 4082 through 4140 4140 4141 through 4201 4201 4202 through 4264 4264 4265 through 4329 4329 4330 through 4395 4395 4396 through 4464 4464 4465 through 4535 4535 4536 through 4608 4608 4609 through 4683 4683 4684 through 4761 4761 4762 through 4842 4842 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate
20. AT CM70S Line Card Console port settings 199 T1 E1 ports 192 AT CV Line Cards configuration files 29 described 40 serial numbers 167 status 128 AT CV5M01 Management Card 21 AT CV5M02 Management Card activating standby card 117 default settings 287 described 21 downloading master configuration files 284 downloading software with TFTP 275 downloading software with XMODEM 279 MAC addresses 121 master configuration files 29 naming 72 85 90 redundant cards 26 resetting 96 restoring default settings 113 serial number 167 uploading master configuration files 281 AT S73 Management Software default settings 288 described 38 downloading with TFTP 275 downloading with XMODEM 279 remote version numbers 187 version numbers 164 AT S99 Management Software default settings 287 described 22 downloading master configuration files 284 downloading with TFTP 275 downloading with XMODEM 279 uploading master configuration files 281 auto copy described 30 setting 151 Auto Negotiation AT CM Line Cards 139 AT CV5MO02 Management Card 107 C configuration files 29 64 See also master configuration files Console port default settings 58 288 described 22 setting baud rate 119 console timeout 90 contact 86 Converteon chassis 34 D date and time setting 71 93 default settings AT CM Line Cards 288 AT CV5MO02 Management Card 287 317 Index dying gasp configuring AT CM Line Cards for 230 described 52 testing 235 E event
21. AT CV5M02 Management Card Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the management card Click the General tab shown in Figure 27 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port A Slot Number 2 Card Type CV5M02 Module Name Module Name Reset Management Card amp Restart System S Return Management Card Port Configuration t Figure 27 General Tab Click Reset Management Card and Restart System Software At the confirmation prompt click OK to reset the management card or Cancel to cancel the procedure To resume managing the chassis wait one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and then start a new management session 97 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Viewing the Event Log For background information refer to Event Log on page 23 Menus To display the event log from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 a Administration Menu E Converteon Ping a Remote System Syslog Server Address Null not configured Syslog Facility Code 1 Event Log Activity Monitor Start Activity Monitor gt Stop Activity Monitor Diagnostics Reset Chassis and Restart Line Cards Ke Return to Main Menu E Figure 28 Administration Menu 2 From the Administration Menu select Event Log to display the Event Log Men
22. Compatible Device Line Card Operating Mode OAM Visible OAM Visible OAM Admin State Enabled Enabled OAM Mode Active Active or Passive OAM Loopback Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client on a line card will participate in OAM loopback tests by returning test packets received on port A from another OAM client This parameter only applies to OAM clients that return the test packets and has no affect on OAM clients that generate the test packets This parameter can be set to Yes or No on the local AT CM Line Cards because these line cards generate the test packets The possible settings for this parameter on remote line cards are O Yes The remote line cards can participate in loopback tests by returning test packets o No The remote line cards cannot participate in loopback tests OAM Variable Requests Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client on a line card will respond to variable retrieval requests from other OAM clients A variable retrieval request is a query of an OAM client by another OAM client for the current value of a MIB object This parameter applies only to OAM clients that are queried and not to OAM clients that send the variable requests This parameter can be set to Yes or No on the local AT CM Line Cards because these line cards generate the variable requests The possible settings for remote OAM compatible devices are
23. Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 CB Em 134 Display Current Configuration Window eem nem nennen eren etenim nene nen nnne 136 Current Configuration Tab eterne dre Renner rit PAR emt Aaaa aeea oa pe an ident e e drei 137 Module Configuration Menu Media Converter Line Card esee 139 Port Management Mer Lese ene teneret etn e RE ERR MESES REEL a En LE ELA TR ERA ERES Mia e E E deacigee Port Configuration Menu teen en eec tke e ix eA re ELSE re SEHR se es dote eae Ne EE sa RR E DER EARNED LE N Port Configuration WindOw ssssseseseeeseeeeneen nennen nemen nennen ene rsen nretenr in ennr senten nennen nnne Operating Mode Config Menu Setting WINdOW UT Max Frame Size Config Menu Auto copy Line Card Configuration Prompt eene nnrnen nnn nen nennen 151 Auto copy Tab ssss Line Card Configuration Menu Display Default Configuration Window sessseeenene nemen nennen nnnm nennen nnne 154 Default Configuration Tab n m nice es Ee Eq debat ecd re tate de i ial Meee
24. For further information refer to OAM based Features on page 46 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 1 lists the line cards in this series Table 1 AT CM Media Converter Line Cards Type of Maximum Line Card Port Slot Connector Cable Speed Distance AT CM201 Fiber Optic Dual ST 50 125 or 100 Mbps 2 kilometers 62 5 125 micron 1 24 miles multi mode Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps or 100 meters 100 Mbps 328 feet AT CM202 Fiber Optic Dual SC 50 125 or 100 Mbps 2 kilometers 62 5 125 micron 1 24 miles multi mode Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps or 100 meters 100 Mbps 328 feet AT CM202 1 Fiber Optic Dual SC 9 125 micron 100 Mbps 15 kilometers single mode 9 4 miles Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps or 100 meters 100 Mbps 328 feet AT CM202 2 Fiber Optic Dual SC 9 125 micron 100 Mbps 40 kilometers single mode 24 8 miles Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps or 100 meters 100 Mbps 328 feet AT CM2KOS sgrp Varies by SFP Varies by SFP 1 25 Gbps Varies by SFP transceiver transceiver transceiver Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps 100 meters 100 Mbps or 328 feet 1000 Mbps AT CM212A 1 Fiber Optic Simplex SC 9 125 micron 100 Mbps 15 kilometers AT CM212B 1 single mode 9 4 miles Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 Mbps 100 meters 328 feet 37 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converte
25. Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostic Menu shown in Figure 45 on page 121 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select Line Card Information An example of the Line Card Module Information window is shown in Figure 71 ZF Line Card Module Information Converteon Module MAC Address Serial Number 1 AT CV5M02 A02803L050600015 c 2 AT CM202 00 0C 46 CE D9 60 A03572L061100040 B 3 AT CM202 00 0C 46 CE D9 72 A03572L061100170 B 4 AT CM202 00 0C 46 CE D9 02 A03572L061100014 B 5 AT CM202 00 0C 46 CE DA 12 A03572L061100111 B 6 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 5C 6F A03578G071400012 A 7 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 5C A1 A03578G071400225 A 8 AT CM212A 1 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500081 B 9 AT CM212A 1 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500120 B 10 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500214 B 11 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500012 B 12 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500087 B 13 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A03713G070500055 B 14 AT CV102 FF FF FF FF FF FF A02765G070500146 D 15 Mezzanine 16 Not Inserted 17 Not Inserted a3 c 18 Not Inserted continue Hit any key to x Figure 71 Line Card Module Information Window 167 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 168 This window is for viewing purposes only The columns in the window are described in Table 19 Table 19 Line Card Module Information
26. SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters Parameter Description Read View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Read View Name allows the users assigned to this Group Name to view the information specified by the View Table entry This value does not need to be unique Write View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Write View Name allows the users assigned to this Security Group to write or modify the information in the specified View Table This value does not need to be unique Notify View Name The value that you configured with the View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table A Notify View Name allows the users assigned to this Group Name to send traps permitted in the specified View This value does not need to be unique Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Context Prefix This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table and is set to null Context Match This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table and is set to exact Row Status This parameter appears only
27. e0 ojoo o eo o SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML ML OAM ML OAM SML ML OAM m 2 cre Gaw e SML AT C 1 LK Xa ss ot M ZW ke t3 xa EI SML ML ML Figure 12 Chassis View 63 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session Saving Your Configuration Changes 64 This section explains the save commands in the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card These commands are used to update the master configuration file in flash memory on the management card with your changes to the parameter settings to the cards When you issue one of these commands the management card copies all or part of its master configuration file in DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage For background information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 There are many save commands but they all do the same thing which is copy the master configuration file from DRAM to flash Where they differ is in the amount of information that s copied This section starts by showing the locations of the commands in the menus and the web browser windows It then explains the functions of the commands Most of the save commands In the menus are located in the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 13 This menu displayed by selecting the Configuration option from the Main Menu has three save commands FK Configuration Menu N System Configuration Save System Configuration Save All Line Car
28. eem 187 Remote Linecard Image Information Tab ssssssseseseseeeeeeen nennen nennen nnne nenreen nennen 189 UART Setting on the AT CM70S Line Card sssssssseeeseeeee enne enne nnrren nennen nnne 193 TDM Manageiment Menus eec ti tee Le seeded a Rein te dote en orae ee de roe gend eit exer gual 194 UART Configuration Menu erecti nee ede dece dece i tee get EE e ve Ee ded ec ee ede 195 LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu sssesseseeeeneeen nennen nennen nennen inneren nene n nnne 196 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 sssssssseeeeeeneneene enne en nene errem nnne nnne 197 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 sssesseeeenneeeen eene nene trennen nenne nnne 197 Local Console Menu on the AT CM7068 Line Card sssesssseseeneeene enne ene nneennenen en 200 OAM Configurations Menu ssssenennen enne nennen nnne nennen nene entente nrnen nene entree nennen nene 204 OAM Configuration Submenu ssssssseesee eene nnne A enne E nne n nene enne nennen nene 205 OAM Gonfig ratiom Tab 1 m t et e eer adiit dt 208 OAM Loopback Test Menu erre redet einen t red oa es ones qa stn pare EUR EI vue Boca Eure AEA aeq 209 Show Loopback Test Statistics Window eseseeeeeenene nemen nennen nene 211 OAM Loopback Test Tab iieri ror oae eie tie ite e rique e oet edi e Seb ie i deed 212 OAM Test Statistics ea RT v t tec e I E E E Pe o e H
29. u uuu First you create a user in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table Then you define the MIB view this user has access to in the Configure SNMPv3 View Table To configure a security group and associate a MIB view to a security group you configure the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Finally configure the Configure SNMPv3 Group menu to associate a user to a security group Figure 109 illustrates of how the user configuration tables are linked SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table SNMPv3 Security To Group Table SNMPV3 Auth Table ETRAS fed by User Linked by View Name Name esum i MEC ee Name i Linked by Group Name 242 Figure 109 SNMPv3 User Configuration Process In general you focus on configuring security groups and then add and delete users from the groups as needed For example you may want to have two groups one for manager privileges and a second one for operator privileges Refer to Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples on page 291 for an example of manager and operator configurations AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide After you configure an SNMPv3 user you need to configure SNMPv3 message notification This configuration is accomplished with the following tables D Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table 0 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table D Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table You start the message notification co
30. v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online Mo Support No Support No Support No Support No Support No Support Mo Support No Support Mo Support No Support 182 Figure 78 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab The columns in the tab are described in Table 21 Table 21 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab Column Description Local This column displays the slot numbers names and Module model names of the line cards in the local chassis that contains the AT CV5M02 Management Card Card Type This column displays the model names of the remote AT CM Line Cards that have established remote peer connections to their local line card counterparts AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 21 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab Column Description Version This column displays the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software on the remote AT CM Line Cards Link A This column displays the status of the remote peer connections between the fiber optic ports on the local and remote AT CM Line Cards The possible states are O The fiber optic port on the local line card in the managed chassis has not established a remote peer management connection with the fiber optic port on the remote line card O Online The fiber optic ports on the local and remote line cards have established a remote peer management connection O No Support
31. v300 100 N 0 0 00 100 N 0 o o N v30 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N v300 100 N O 0 oo 100 N 0 100 N 100 100 N 100 100 N 100 100 N 100 100 N 100 Ear gg g2 Xx X Xxi1 Ne Figure 107 Module Status and Configuration Menu Highlight the line card you want to configure and press Return to display the Module Configuration Menu for the card The menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Note If the line card is already set to the OAM visible mode go to step 11 Otherwise continue to the next step Select Configure Operating Mode to display the Operating Mode Config Menu for the line card From the Operating Mode Config Menu select OAM Visible Mode This confirmation prompt is displayed warning Changing the Operation Mode will reset the line card Change Operation Mode now Yes or No Type Y This prompt is displayed If auto copy is enable operation mode change need to be saved to take affect Save line card configuration before rebooting Yes or No Type Y for yes to update the master configuration file on the management card with the new setting for the card s operating mode This step is especially important if the auto copy feature is activated on
32. variables you have to configure for the dying gasp feature For information on the other parameters in this window refer to Configuring an OAM Client on page 204 20 Return to the Main Menu 21 Select Configuration 22 Select Save System and All Line Card Configurations 23 Return to the Main Menu This completes the procedure for configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Card for the dying gasp feature Repeat this procedure on all of the line cards that will send or receive the signal in the AT CV1203 and AT CV5000 Chassis Afterwards for those line cards intended for the AT CV1203 Chassis install the line cards in the units and deploy the units at the remote sites Testing the Feature AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To test the feature 1 Verify that the AT CV1203 and AT CV5000 Chassis are powered on and the fiber optic ports on the AT CM Line Cards are cabled correctly For installation and cabling instructions refer to the chassis and line card installation guides Start a management session on the AT CV5M02 Management Card in the AT CV5000 Chassis From the Main Menu select Remote Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Peer on Fiber Connection window which is used to configure remote AT CM Line Cards The remote peer management feature has nearly the same configuration requirements as the dying gasp feature So if the remote peer management feature is working betwe
33. 0 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To specify the IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the left menu bar 2 Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 24 on page 87 3 To change the addresses of the SNMP trap receivers click Edit to display a pop up window 4 In the Manager Address fields enter the IP addresses of up to four trap receivers 5 Click Update 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and click Apply 89 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Configuring Management Security 90 Menus The AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card has several security features that protect the card from unauthorized access There are manager and operator passwords and a console time out feature that automatically ends inactive management sessions Additionally there are controls for enabling or disabling local or remote access to the management card To configure the security features from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration This displays the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Men
34. 0C 46 98 22 5F CONVERTEON Chassis AT CV5000 AC Revision 3 0 0 Hit any key to continue 122 Chassis Diagnostics Menu Running O days 1 hours 10 minutes 9 seconds Current Time 12 08 07 01 10 47 Diagnostic Results Flash PROM Serial Interface Good RPSA 3 3V Power Fan Status RPSB 3 3V Power Fan Status Good Good Temperature 25 C 3 2 V 5V Power 4 9 V 12V Power 0 0 v Good Fanl Speed 3924 RPM Fan2 Speed 3994 RPM Not Present Temperature 25 C 0 v 5V Power 0 v 12V Power 0 0 v Not Present Fani Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off Figure 46 Chassis Diagnostics Menu The information in the Chassis Diagnostics Menu is defined in Table 12 Table 12 Chassis Diagnostics Menu Row Description Serial This field displays the serial number and hardware Number revision level of the chassis MAC This field displays the MAC address of the backplane in Address the chassis The management card uses this address as its MAC address when it communicates with your network through the 10 100Base TX port Converteon This field displays the chassis model name and revision Chassis level such as AT CV5000 Revision 1 7 Running This field displays the number of hours minutes and seconds since the management card was last powered on or reset Current This field displays the current date and time Time Web Browser AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Tab
35. 1 eene nennen nnne tenete ren nennen nnne nnns Remote Peer Management Example 2 enin tentiae etin nes ene akanaka aaiae einn dene ede Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu sess nennen nnne nns Remote Module Status and Configuration Window Downloading New AT S73 Management Software to Remote AT CM Line Cards eee 50 Loopback Test iii Es ter qe pes apfel to telnet t det d eei Ue Se qeiec tee Past ide Mets 51 Dying Gasp FealUtre eene stet e dee tert E ee LUI Ene ea m UE Exe inge ra inve in ie eoe dn e Aa o 2e a 52 1st Failure Sign al 2 ree TEC Pt ERE rH hr t ome er cedido 53 Connecting the Management Cable to the Management Card s Console Port sese 58 Main MenU sicuro eo UG ERU eie a e B REB eU 59 URE Field inva Web Browser erinnerte sro x Ben re Hr i ere Ue adm eL AERE aa ne die an 62 Chassis VIeW 1r rete tr vee voce E PUER RENE EXE yee cay asl vas FERRE I DEREN RN E 63 Save Commands in the Configuration Menu essen nnne enne enin 64 Save Commands in the Files Tab ceteri eren tere Ree r eene ea ne dao B Bug e age nenas dea tede dee 65 Save Command in the Line Card Configuration Menu for a Local AT CM Line Card cecene 65 Save Command in the Line Card Configuration Menu for a Local AT CM Line Card scence 66 Management Card Redundancy Menu sse nnne errem nere enn nennen nene 67 Managem
36. All Line Card Configurations 207 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 208 Web Browser To configure the OAM clients on the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card you want to configure The OAM client is only supported on Port A Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it 4 Select the OAM Configuration tab to display the OAM Configuration window shown in Figure 91 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Help Operation Mode Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 11 Module AT CM202 OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 64 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Link Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 91 OAM Configuration Tab If the OAM Configuration tab is not included in the window either you did not select Port A or the line card is not set to the OAM visible mode or the OAM bypass mode 5 To change the OAM settings click Edit to display the OAM Configuration pop up window and
37. Current Configuration Tab 137 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 138 This window is for viewing purposes only The parameters for the fiber optic port and the twisted pair port are described in Table 16 on page 141 The OAM settings described in Table 25 on page 205 are only displayed when the operating mode of a line card is set to the OAM visible or OAM bypass mode For an explanation of the Save Current Configuration button refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Port Parameters on AT CM Line Cards Note The port settings on AT CV Line Cards are not adjustable Menus To configure the parameter settings on the ports on AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The current settings for the line card s two ports are displayed in the Module Configuration Menu An example is shown Figure 53 a Module Configuration Menu UN Converteon Module 4 Module AT CM202 v2 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseFX online 100M Full B 100BaseTX online 100M Full Module Name Configure Operating Mode Display DIP S
38. Level parameters configured in the SNMPv3 Access Table D User Name Security Model and Group Name configured in the SNMPv3 Group Table When you enter user security information in an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry the information must match the configuration in the SNMPv3 tables listed above If the user security information in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry does not match the configuration in the tables listed above messages are not sent on behalf of the user Note In the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table the Security Name parameter is the equivalent to the User Name parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table The parameters for the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table are Target Parameters Name Security Name User Name Security Model Security Level uuu iau Storage Type 267 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 General Access Table User View Table Table Target Parameters Table Add More To access the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table menu is shown in Figure 123 UN a Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry Return to SNMPv3 Configurati
39. Location Information 86 Menus Web Browser To enter the chassis location and the name of the network manager responsible for managing the chassis 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 22 on page 81 To enter the location of the chassis select Location The location can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To enter the name phone number or other information that identifies the person responsible for managing the system select Contact and enter a value of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To enter the contact and location information from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Configuration from the left menu bar Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 24 Manager Address Manager Address Manager Address Manager Address Get C
40. Module 15 Port C Transmit All Ones gt Transmit Data Normally gt Transmit PRBS Disable Transmit PRBS Enable gt Remote Loopback Disable Remote Loopback Enable gt Local Loopback Disable Local Loopback Enable BOUT to LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu P Figure 87 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 As you configure the ports the top selection in the LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu changes to Customized Mode to indicate that the port settings have been changed from their default values 197 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 7 Adjust the settings as needed Refer to Table 24 for the possible settings Table 24 T1 E1 Port Settings Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the AT CV5M02 Management Card O Transmit Data Normally default o Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the Console Port on the AT CM70S Line Card Normal default Unframed All Ones Parameter T1 Settings E1 Settings Receiver Sensitivity Setting D Limited Long Haul O Short Haul CD Long Haul default CD Long Haul default Line Build Out DO DSX 1 CSU 0 to 133ft D 75 Ohm Normal default 9 120 Ohm Normal default o DSX 1 133 to 26610 75 Normal with High o DSX 1 266 to 399ft Return Loss o DSX 1 399 to 533ft o 120 Normal with High 3 DSX 1 533 to 655ft Return Loss o 7 5dB CSU o 15dB CSU o 22 5dB CSU Menu selections from the AT CV5M02
41. Remote Loopback gt Disable Remote Loopback Start Loopback Test gt Stop Loopback Test Show Loopback Test Statistics Clear Loopback Test Statistics V Return to OAM Configurations J Figure 92 OAM Loopback Test Menu 209 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 210 6 From the OAM Loopback Test Menu select Enable Remote Loopback A Caution The local media converter line card and its remote counterpart stop forwarding network traffic Some network traffic may be lost Note There may be a delay of several seconds before the menu reflects your selection If the line card is not configured correctly for the OAM loopback test an error message is displayed The messages are described here OAM port is disconnected This message indicates that port A on the local line card has not established a link with its counterpart on the remote line card possibly because the fiber optic cable is not connected to the ports OAM is not in active mode This message indicates that the OAM mode of the line card is set to the passive mode instead of the active mode To correct the problem perform the procedure Configuring an OAM Client on page 204 and change the Mode setting from Passive to Active in the OAM Configuration submenu Line card not in OAM visible mode This message indicates that the line card s operational mode is set to the OAM bypass mode instead
42. Remote This column displays the model names of the remote Module AT CM Line Cards Application This column displays the version numbers of the Version management software on the remote AT CM Line Cards Bootloader This column displays the version numbers of the Version bootloader files on the remote AT CM Line Cards 189 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 190 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card This chapter contains the following sections o Selecting the Management Method for the T1 E1 Ports on page 192 o Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 196 o Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card on page 199 191 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card Selecting the Management Method for the T1 E1 Ports 192 The parameter settings for the four T1 E1 ports on the AT CM70S Line Card can be configured through the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card or through the Console port on the card itself However since the card is unable to support both methods at the same time you have to choose which management method you intend to use and specify the method during the initial configuration of the card This is referred to as setting the card s UART universal asynchronous receiver transmitted setti
43. Select Line Card Configuration to display the menu in Figure 62 on page 153 Select Auto copy Line Card Configuration The following prompt is displayed Display Current Configuration Auto copy enable gt Auto copy disable Return to Line Card Confirmation Figure 60 Auto copy Line Card Configuration Prompt 151 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 5 Select the desired setting for the auto copy feature for the line card s slot The default setting is disabled If you enable auto copy and later replace this line card with another card of the same model the new card will be assigned the same parameter settings as this card 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Line Card Configuration Menu and select Save Line Card Configuration Web Browser To set the auto copy feature from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click either of the ports on the AT CM Line Card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time 3 Select the Line Card Configuration tab 4 Select the Auto copy tab shown in Figure 61 152 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Line Card Configuration Setting Current Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration C
44. Statistics Loopback Test Request Module AT CM202 Disable Figure 94 OAM Loopback Test Tab 5 To activate the loopback test on the local line card click Edit in the Remote Loopback field to display a pop up window and select Enable from the pull down menu A Caution At this point the local media converter line card and its remote counterpart stop forwarding network traffic Some network traffic may be lost 6 7 OAM Test Statistics Number of Seconds Number of Tx Frames Number of Rx Frames Number of Rx Errored Frames Number of Tx Bytes Number of Rx Bytes Number of Erroed Bytes Number of Tx Bits Number of Rx Bits Number of Rx Errored Bits AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To start the test click Edit in the OAM Loopback Test field to display a pop up window and select Start from the pull down menu The local line card begins to transmit test packets to the remote line card To view test statistics click Show OAM Test Statistics An example of the counters is shown in Figure 95 Module Status amp Configuration CLOSE O O O O O O O O O O Clear Loopback Statistics Figure 95 OAM Test Statistics The first line displays the duration of the test in seconds The counters display the number of test packets the local OAM client transmitted to its remote counterpart over the fiber optic connection and the number of packets the local client received back The
45. The value of this field starts at zero and be incremented each time something in the Information TLV changes Upon reception of an Information TLV from a peer an OAM Client may use this field to decide if it needs to be processed an Information TLV that is identical to the previous Information TLV doesn t need to be parsed as nothing in it has changed Vendor Information Vendor OUI Indicates the 32 bit identifier that may be used to differentiate a vendor s product models versions Contains the Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI of 00 30 84 for Allied Telesis Loopback State Indicates the current loopback state of the OAM client o None No loopback initiated D Initiating Loopback The local OAM client is initiating a loopback test with the remote client O Remote in Loopback The remote OAM client has received the loopback command from the local client and is ready to participate or is already participating in the loopback test O Terminating Loopback The local OAM client is ending the loopback test In Loopback Test Indicates whether or not the OAM client is currently running a loopback test D Yes The OAM client is running a loopback test o No The OAM client is not running a loopback test 219 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Web Browser windows 1 To display status information for local OAM cli
46. The local line card does not support the feature Local AT CM Line Cards display this state if they are not configured for remote peer management or if the remote device is something other than an AT CM Line Card This status is also displayed by the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CV Line Cards 2 To configure a remote line card click the model name of its local line card counterpart to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration page shown in Figure 79 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Menu View Port Port Status Configuration Help Line Card Configuration Setting OAM Configuration Slot Number 14 Card Type CM202 Remote Port Status Flow Control Link Status Speed Duplex Mode Ingress Rate Limit Egrees Rate Lirnit Enable Online 100M Full No Limit No Lirnit Figure 79 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Page 183 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Note You cannot disable the ports or change the operating modes or the OAM settings on remote line cards Your changes to the settings on a remote line card are automatically saved in the card s configuration file in flash memory and are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the unit For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 3 When you finish configuring a remo
47. There is little likelihood you would ever respond with No to this prompt This step isn t applicable to the AT CM70S Line Card because it doesn t support the auto copy feature The line card resets and the management software displays the Module Status and Configuration menu again AT CM Line Cards have to initialize their management software and configure their operating parameters a process that takes approximately one minute before they can resume normal operations In contrast AT CV Line Cards immediately return to normal operations because they do not have management software Web Browser Chassis View Slot Number Module Name Module Name Operation Mode Operation Mode AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To set the operating modes of the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 3 Module Status amp Configuration Menu View 6 Region22 OAM Visible Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click one of the ports on the line card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Setting tab shown in Figure 58 Line Card Configuration Card Type CM202 4 5 Figure 58 Setting Window Click Edit in the Operation Mode section of the window In the Operation Mode pop up window select the
48. View Table cc User Table a T O User Name Parameter SNMPyi1 amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files Notify DATA Table Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Authentication Protocol Row Status Privacy Protocol Storage Type Figure 112 SNMPv3 User Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 User Table entries are defined in Table 28 Table 28 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters Description User Security Name Authentication Protocol A descriptive name for the user of up to 32 alphanumeric characters The user s authentication protocol The possible values are M MD5 This value represents the MD5 authentication protocol Users SNMP entities are authenticated with the MD5 authentication protocol after a message is received This algorithm generates the message digest The user is authenticated when the authentication protocol checks the message digest With the MD5 selection you can configure a Privacy Protocol S SHA This value represents the SHA authentication protocol With this selection users are authenticated with the SHA authentication protocol after a message is received This algorithm generates the message digest The user is authenticated when the authentication protocol checks the message digest With the SHA selection you can configure a Privacy Protocol 249 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 28 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters Parameter Des
49. Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers and the model names of the cards MAC Address Serial Number This column displays the MAC addresses of the AT CM Line Cards in the chassis Management cards are not assigned MAC addresses Rather they adopt the MAC address of their chassis To view the MAC address of a chassis refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 121 The AT CV Line Cards have the MAC address FF FF FF FF FF FF This column displays the serial numbers of the cards Web Browser To view the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Select the Diagnostics tab 3 Select the Linecard Information tab shown in Figure 72 on page 169 This window is for viewing purposes only The columns in the window are described in Table 19 on page 168 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Administration Administration gt Diagnostics General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics ec Ee r ee Local Module Mac Address Serial Number 1 AT CV5MD02 ze A02803L050600015 C 2 AT CM202 00 00 46 CE D9 72 A03572L061100040 B 3 AT CM202 00 00 46 CE D9 02 A03572L061100070 B 4 AT CM202 00 00 46 CE DA12 A03572L061100014 B 5 AT CM202 00 15 77 52 5C 6F A03572L061100111 B 6 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 5C A1
50. a process that takes approximately one minute To save your changes in the master configuration file wait for the line card to finish initializing its management software Then select Configuration from the menu bar From the Configuration window select the Files tab and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Restoring the Last Saved Configuration Menus These procedures restore AT CM Line Cards to their last saved configurations The configurations are obtained from the master configuration file on the management card You might perform this procedure to discard parameter changes that you made to a line card but did not save or to configure a new line card with the save settings as its predecessor in the chassis For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 This procedure is not applicable to the AT CV Line Cards A Caution Restoring a line card to the last saved configuration may disrupt network operations Some traffic may be lost A line card whose current operating mode is different from its last saved configuration has to initialize its management software after it receives the new configuration from the management card During the initialization process which takes approximately one minute the line card forwards network traffic using the default values for its parameter settings To restore the last saved
51. address of the router interface of the first hop to reaching the server The 10 100Base TX port on the card has to be connected to a device on your network such as an Ethernet switch The management card communicates with your network through that port You should start the TFTP server before you begin the download procedure Store the new image files on the TFTP server You have to configure the TFTP client before you can download new management software For instructions refer to Configuring the TFTP Client on page 273 Note Allied Telesis recommends that you update the master configuration file on the management card with the current configurations of all the AT CM Line Cards in the chassis before performing this procedure For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 Note Updating the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card interrupts the card s operations The card will be unresponsive for approximately two minutes as it downloads and initializes the new software Your management session ends and you have to start a new management session to continue managing the unit 275 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files A Caution Updating the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM Line Cards interrupts the cards network operations Some network traffic may be lost The line cards stop forwarding network traffic for approximately two minutes whil
52. cards and is not adjustable This feature has the following restrictions O Variable requests use the following MIB tree prefix iso 1 member body 2 us 840 ieee802dot3 10006 csmacdmgt 30 0 Variable requests are transmitted from Port A the fiber optic port on the line cards This feature is not supported on Port B the twisted pair port O You can use OAM variable requests to view but not change MIB values 0 This feature cannot be used to view the MIB objects in the private Allied Telesis MIB Note The AT CM Line Cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable requests can access So although the line cards can send variable requests to query other OAM compatible devices for MIB values they do not respond to variable requests For instructions refer to Viewing MIB Variables with OAM Variable Requests on page 225 55 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards OAM Client Settings Table 5 lists the parameter settings for the OAM clients on the AT CM Line Cards for the OAM based features The instructions on how to configure the clients can be found in Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 74 and Configuring an OAM Client on page 204 Table 5 OAM Parameter Settings for the OAM based Features OAM Parameter Local AT CM Line Card in a Managed Chassis Remote AT CM Line Card or Other OAM
53. configuration you probably don t know the auto copy setting for the slot But respond with Yes anyway In fact there is little likelihood you would ever respond with No to this prompt This step isn t applicable to the AT CM70S Line Card because it doesn t support the auto copy feature The operating mode on the line card is changed to OAM visible and the card resets Wait one minute for the line card to initialize its management software and then select it again from the Module Status and Configuration Menu From the line card s Module Configuration Menu select Port A the fiber optic port to display the Port Management Menu Select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration menu If the menu does not include the OAM configuration selection the line card isn t set to the OAM visible mode Select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu Check the Admin State parameter It has to be set to Enabled If it is set to Disabled select Admin State and press Return to toggle the parameter to Enabled Check the Mode parameter It has to be set to Active If it is set to Passive highlight Mode and press Return to toggle the parameter to Active If the line card will be installed at a remote site and you want it to support the OAM loopback test the Loopback Support parameter has to be set to Yes If it is set to No highlight Loopback Support and press Return to toggle the parameter to Yes This paramet
54. configuration file in flash memory with the current settings of the management card but ignores any changes to the settings of the AT CM Line Cards You might use this command if you changed the parameters on the management card and the line cards but only want to save your management card changes Of course this is unlikely because you ll probably always want to save all of your changes But the command is here just in case O Save All Line Card Configurations This command is similar to the previous command But instead of saving just your changes to the management card it ignores those changes and instead saves just your changes to the AT CM Line Cards AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide O Save Line Card Configuration menus and Save Current Configuration web browser windows These commands make it easier for you to save your changes after configuring the individual local or remote AT CM Line Cards Rather than having to return to the Main Menu or the Files tab after configuring a line card you can save your changes with these commands instead Note If you re confused by all of these save commands then just stick with the Save System and All Line Card Configuration command That command insures that the master configuration file in flash memory on the management card has the current settings from all the cards in the chassis There are two more save commands that are related to redundant AT CV5M02 Man
55. configuration of a line card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed 3 Select Line Card Configuration to display the menu in Figure 62 on page 153 4 To view the parameter settings of the card s last saved configuration before activating them on the line card select Display Last Saved Configuration 5 To return the line card to its last saved configuration return to the Line Card Configuration menu and select Restore Last Saved Configuration 6 At the confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the settings or No to cancel the procedure 157 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Web Browser To restore the last saved configuration to an AT CM Line Card from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click either of the ports on the line card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time 3 Select the Line Card Configuration tab 4 Torestore the previous configuration to the line car
56. eer sel Sen ide eerste 89 Configuring Management Security ee E innere trennen taie A nsa inner deseada tete tae ene aeterne aine 90 MID PH 90 Web Browse osin x L 92 Manually Setting the Date and Time cccccccccceeceseceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeesaaaeaeceeseaaeaeceseecanaeceseeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeseeesessaeeeesesnaaees 93 MG MUS m L 93 Msi Rm 94 Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client sesseeeeseeenneeen nene nennen enneen enn en enne en nnn ener nen nene 95 Menus 4328804 AE E menie aetema enm e 95 Web BrowSeris ER Ec 95 Resetting the Management Card c sceceesceececoncestecervsnanedgeenesdteteuuscnesecgensuneedegsnecsooeceeuscenssiguecpespauecessigensecesetgenereescderses 96 Men Siia a pieta leue teda ftetit de feet bog de iR ep tope eR de cde edo eese Seis OS tg 96 Web Brows6 ii eee ipe i ee G se ee e t ue ETE goce epe gd 97 Viewing the Event LOg pee 98 MOTUS ia eea a aaa a a a a Saa aeaa iea eia solani Jeunes tens Steeles 98 laine terge e r a a a a a aaa aa a aaa aaa dds eae e Ea a aa aa eaa aed 103 Viewing the Activity Monitor snidani a ee Ue NNE eee ap NE EE obit EE tede eee dere ea 104 MenUS cere tte n RUE PER ee a e ER eit an Re erat tbe ir ERE EDU RR REUS Rm bees 104 Web BrowSer C
57. from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 Select the local AT CM Line Card whose remote OAM counterpart you want to query with an OAM variable request The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 Select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 on page 140 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu shown in Figure 89 on page 204 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Send OAM Variable Request The prompt in Figure 102 is displayed Converteon Enter branch number 0 255 Figure 102 Enter Branch Number Prompt 225 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 6 Enter the branch number of the MIB package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 The prompt in Figure 103 is displayed Converteon Enter leaf number 0 255 gt Figure 103 Enter Leaf Number Prompt 7 Enter the leaf number of the package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 If the remote OAM device has a value for the corresponding MIB object the value is displayed on the screen Web Browser To send MIB variable requests from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chas
58. is enabled When this option is set to disabled you cannot manage the chassis from a remote Telnet client Note A management card where both local and remote management are disabled can still be managed with a web browser 92 Web Browser 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To configure the security features of the management software from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the left menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it An example of the System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 3 To configure the security features click Edit in the Omega Options section of the tab to display a popup window 4 Configure the parameters as needed The options are defined in Table 7 Omega Options Menu on page 91 5 Click Update 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and click Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Manually Setting the Date and Time Menus To manually set the date and time on the management card perform the procedures in this section The date and time are added to event messages and SNMP traps Note When the date and time are set manually they are not retained when the chassis or man
59. log described 23 displaying 98 F flow control 139 l IP address configuration described 23 setting 70 80 L Link Test operating mode described 42 selecting 145 local management described 25 enabling or disabling 90 starting 58 location 86 M MAC addresses AT CM and AT CV Line Cards 167 AT CV5M02 Management Card 121 manager account changing password 69 90 described 24 master configuration files described 29 downloading 284 redundant management cards 32 saving parameter settings 64 uploading 281 MDI MDIX AT CM Line Cards 139 AT CV5M02 Management Card 107 menus navigation 60 MissingLink operating mode described 43 selecting 145 N naming AT CM Line Cards 149 AT CV5M02 Management Card 85 remote AT CM Line Cards 179 Network Time Protocol NTP client configuring 71 95 described 24 requirements 28 318 Oo OAM Bypass operating mode described 45 selecting 145 OAM clients configuring 204 default settings 288 local status 214 remote status 221 statistics 223 OAM loopback tests configuring AT CM Line Cards for 74 described 51 performing 209 OAM variable requests configuring AT CM Line Cards for 74 described 55 performing 225 OAM Visible operating mode described 45 selecting 145 OAM based features configuring on AT CM Line Cards 74 described 46 settings 56 OAMPDUS setting maximum size 206 operating modes configuring 45 described 42 displaying 128 selecting 145 operator account changing pas
60. loss of the link on port B The states of the ports on a line card running in this mode operate in tandem Either both of the ports have a link or neither of the ports This is reflected on the Link LEDs and in the management software If both ports can form links with their network devices their Link LEDs will both be on 43 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 44 Smart MissingLink Mode and their status in the management software will be Online If one or both ports cannot establish a link then the Link LEDs will be off and their status in the management software will be Offline This operating mode is useful when the network devices connected to the ports of a line card can react to a loss of a link on a port such as managed Fast Ethernet switches running SNMP or a spanning tree protocol Conversely the MissingLink mode will be of little value if the network devices of a line card cannot react to a lost link In the latter scenario the Link Test mode would probably be a better operating mode for a line card during normal network operations Furthermore Allied Telesis does not recommend using the MissingLink mode when troubleshooting a network problem that may have its roots with a link problem The MissingLink mode will not allow you to use the port s Link LEDs or the management software to diagnose the problem since neither port will show a link Rather the Link Test and the Smart MissingLink modes are mo
61. nnns 165 Line Card Module Information Window seeseeeeeenenen nee eem nennen nnnm nenne nene nnne nnns 168 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu esses enne eene rennen nnne 174 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab ssssssssssssseeeeeeeen nee nee nnne nene nennen nnns 182 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window ssseeenn emere 188 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window semen eene 189 TIET Port Settings eio pee ee Ies tene ipe dee eoe qed nore SE Ee ded ede ede d qe pers rae nadaan OAM Client Parameters Show Local OAM Information WindOW ssseesseeeeneene emere ennemi nennen enr ren nene enne 215 Version Numbers of AT CM Line Cards that Support the Dying Gasp Feature see 231 SNMPv3 User Table Parameters 12er die ee fre drei ice dete oig dme Sedo soe quic an 249 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters ence ee eue ue Ede eee peso pe tpe La odo ede dede ne dada Ree pe drei 252 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters sse eene nennen enne enne nnne nennen nnns 255 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters icio eri ipe specs deiei qd dive ei E adde cde e Eae ded ead SE qh eedeooesseveds 259 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters sssssssesesseeeeneneen nennen nnne enr en tenen nnne neret nene enne nns 262 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters sse enne enne nne enne 265 SNMPv3 Target Parameters
62. of the OAM visible mode To correct the problem perform the procedure Setting the Operating Mode on page 145 and select the OAM visible mode from the Operating Mode Config Menu If you select Enable Remote Loopback and after several seconds it remains unselected it probably means that support for the loopback test is disabled on the remote line card To begin the test select Start Loopback Test from the OAM Loopback Test Menu The test starts immediately 8 10 11 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To view test statistics select Show Loopback Test Statistics The Show Loopback Test Statistics window is shown in Figure 93 a Show Loopback Test Statistics UN Module 5 Port 1 Number of Seconds 71 Number of Tx Frames 71 Number of Rx Frames 71 Number of Rx Errored Frames 0 Number of Tx Bytes 4260 Number of Rx Bytes 4260 Number of Rx Errored Bytes 0 Number of Tx Bits 34080 Number of Rx Bits 34080 Number of Rx Errored Bits 0 X Ret rm to OAM Loopback Test 27 Figure 93 Show Loopback Test Statistics Window The first line displays the duration of the test in seconds The counters display the number of test packets the local OAM client transmitted to its remote counterpart over the fiber optic connection and the number of packets the local client received back The measurements are given in frames bytes octets and bits The local client should receive the same number of te
63. pieces of information included in the message Oo The type of message 0 The destination of the message O SNMP security information To configure the type of message you need to define if you are sending a Trap or Inform message Basically the switch expects a response to an Inform message and the switch does not expect a response to a Trap message These two message types are defined in the SNMPv3 RFC 2571 6 To determine the destination of the message you configure the IP address of the host This configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c configuration The SNMP security information consists of information about the following User View of the MIB Tree Security Level Security Model Authentication Level Privacy Protocol uuuuuiu uiu Group To configure the SNMP security information you associate a user and its related information View Security Level Security Model Authentication Level Privacy Protocol and Group with the type of message and the host IP address 241 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Tables The SNMPv3 configuration is neatly divided into configuring SNMPv3 user information and configuring the message notification You must configure all seven tables to successfully configure the SNMPv3 protocol You use the following tables for user configuration Configure SNMPv3 User Table Configure SNMPv3 View Table Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Configure SNMPv3 Group Table
64. removed If desired you can add the configuration settings of remote line cards to the master configuration file in the management card in the local chassis so that you can restore them to the remote cards should that ever be necessary To save the settings in the master configuration file select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration If you ever need to restore the setting to the line card perform Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 181 181 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Web Browser Windows Menu View Local Module AT CV5M02 AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM2124 1 AT CM2124 1 AT CM2124 1 AT CM2124 1 AT CVv102 AT CVv102 AT CVv102 AT CVv102 AT CVv102 UN EQUIP _UN EQUIP__ _UN EQUIP__ _UN EQUIP__ o0 W O wg amp on HE E e oH HR H B H oH oH pe A A E O NEG Select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar to display the Remote Module Status amp Configuration tab shown in Figure 78 Card Type No Support AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM202 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212A 1 No Support No Support Mo Support Mo Support Mo Support To configure remote AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows Remote Module Status amp Configuration Version Link A No Support No Support v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online v3 0 0 Online
65. removed If desired you can add the configuration settings of remote line cards to the master configuration file in the management card in the local chassis so that you can restore them to the remote cards should that ever be necessary To update the master configuration file in flash memory on the management card click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button If you ever want to restore the setting to the line card or to a replacement card perform Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 185 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Displaying the Version Numbers of Remote AT CM Line Cards These procedures are used to view the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software and bootloader files on remote AT CM Line Cards Note This procedure requires that the local and remote line cards be configured for remote peer management Menus To view the information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostic Menu shown in Figure 45 on page 121 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select Remote Line Card Image Version An example of the Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version window is shown in Figure 80 The information in this window is for viewing purposes only 2 Remote L
66. respond with yes the management card resets and your management session ends 5 To resume managing the unit wait one minute for the card to initialize its management software and then start a local management session on the card 6 If the chassis has two management cards reinstall the standby card To restore the default settings on the management card from the web browser windows 1 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards remove the standby card 2 Click Configuration from the menus bar 3 Click the Files tab shown in Figure 14 on page 65 4 Click the radio button for Return Configuration in Management Card to Default and click Apply The management card resets and your remote web browser management session ends 5 To resume managing the unit wait one minute for the card to initialize its management software and then start a local management session on the card 6 If the chassis has two management cards reinstall the standby card AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Temperature Threshold Menus Web Browser The management card has a temperature threshold parameter to alert you in the event the temperature of the wiring closet exceeds operating norms If the threshold is exceeded the management card enters an event in the event log and sends an SNMP trap The temperature is measured on the power supply near the cooling vents of the chassis and tends to reflect th
67. return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values select Return Line Card to Default Configuration from the Line Card Configuration Menu At the confirmation prompt select Yes to return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values or No to cancel the procedure If you select Yes the parameter settings on the card return to the default settings If the card s previous operating mode was OAM visible the card resumes normal network operations almost immediately If however the card s previous operating mode was another operating mode the card has to initialize its management software a process that takes about one minute During this process this message is displayed on the screen Setting operation mode and resetting line card AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 7 To save your changes in the master configuration file wait for the line card to finish initializing its management software and then select Save Line Card Configuration from the Line Card Configuration Menu Web Browser Toreturn the parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards to the default settings from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click either port on the AT CM Line Card you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time 3 Click the Line
68. that accepts a value the gt symbol is displayed For example System name gt When you see the gt symbol enter a new value for the parameter After entering a value press Return Unless stated otherwise all changes are immediately implement by the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards 60 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Starting a Telnet Management Session Note The requirements for remote Telnet management are listed in Access to Your Network on page 28 The large windows in the management software require a Telnet client that can support up to 125 characters per line To start a remote Telnet management session on a management card 1 Specify the IP address of the management card in the Telnet client at your workstation If the chassis has two management cards enter the IP address of the active card When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account of the management card The manager account has the username manager and the default password friend The operator account has the username operator and the default password operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive After you log on the Main Menu in Figure 10 on page 59 is displayed For instructions on how to use the menus refer to Table 6 on page 60 You have the same management capabilities from a Telnet management session as you do from a local managem
69. the Internet Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP client for assigning the management card s IP address configuration from a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network The AT CV5M02 Management Card has these additional features m m Remote in band management using the card s web browser server from web browser clients on your network Redundant management cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis Manual or automatic restoration of previous parameter configurations on local or remote AT CM Line Cards Note For instructions on how to use the AT CV5M01 Management Card and the AT S70 Management Software refer to the AT S70 Management Software User s Guides 21 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card AT S99 Management Software Console Port The AT CV5M02 Management Card uses the AT S99 Management Software This program comes pre installed on the card with default values for all of the operating parameters New versions of the software can be downloaded onto the card using XMODEM or Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP as explained in Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files on page 271 The management card has an RS 232 Console port for local management of a Converteon chassis with a terminal or a personal computer and a terminal emulator program The initial management session of a management card has to be a local session For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 10
70. the card s slot If the card s operating mode isn t saved in the master configuration file the new setting will not take affect because the card after resetting will revert to its previous operating mode If you are not sure whether or not the auto copy feature is enabled on the slot select Yes anyway In fact there is little likelinood you would ever respond with No to this prompt This step isn t applicable to the AT CM70S Line Card because it doesn t support the auto copy feature The operating mode on the line card changes to OAM visible and the card resets Wait approximately one minute for the line card to initialize its management software and then select it again from the Module Status and Configuration Menu From the Module Configuration Menu select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 on page 140 Select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration menu shown in Figure 89 on page 204 Select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu shown in Figure 90 on page 205 If the Admin State is set to Disabled select Admin State and press Return to toggle the parameter to Enabled 233 Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp 234 19 If the Mode parameter is set to Passive highlight Mode and press Return to toggle the parameter to Active Note The Admin State and the Mode parameters are the only OAM
71. the management Card software To assign a name to the management card 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration menu select System Configuration 3 Select System Name and enter a new name of up to 39 characters for the card Spaces and special characters are permitted 4 Return to the Main Menu The card s new name does not appear until you return to the Main Menu Saving Your This completes the initial configuration of the management card To save Changes your changes in the master configuration file on the management card 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the System Configuration Menu select Save System and All Line Card Configurations The following message is displayed Saving system and all line card configuration After the management card updates its master configuration file it displays this prompt Saving system and all line card configuration OK Press any key to continue 3 Return to the Main Menu 72 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide For further instructions on how to configure the management card refer to Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 79 73 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features 74 Are you planning to implement any of these OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards Remote peer management Remot
72. the management card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Name and enter a new name for the card of up to 40 characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current name without entering a new name press the space bar once 4 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To assign a name to the management card from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it An example of the System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 3 Click Edit in the System Information section of the tab 4 In the pop up window select the System Name field and enter a new name for the card of up to 40 characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current name without entering a new name press the space bar once 5 Click Update 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply 85 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Assigning Contact and
73. to enter on the DHCP server refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 121 The management card does not actually have a MAC address Instead it adopts the MAC address of the backplane of the chassis as its MAC address whenever it communicates with your network 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations Web Browser To change the IP address configuration of the management card from the web browser windows Note Your remote web browser management session of the chassis automatically ends if you change the IP address of the management card from the web browser windows To resume managing the Converteon chassis start a new session using the card s new IP address 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Ifthe System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 23 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Files System Information System Mame System Date 00 00 00 System Time 00 04 24 NTP Server 0 0 0 0 NTP Disable Omega Options Manager Password OIN ck Local Omega Enable Operator Password bs chi aia ENE Remote Omega Enable Timeout 10 Edit Terminal Setting Baudrate 1152000 Temperature Threshold Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 C IP Parameters IP Address Gateway Address 10 0 0
74. to the line card C This displays the status of a line card s response to the last transmitted message from the management card A successful response is indicated by while a bad response or no response is signalled with o VER This column displays the version numbers of the management software programs on the management cards and the AT CM Line Cards in the local chassis The AT CV Line Cards do not have management software REMOTE MODULE Mod Name This column displays the names of those remote AT CM Line Cards that have remote peer management connections to their local counterparts in the managed chassis CardTypeVer This column displays the model names of the remote line cards VER This column displays the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software on the remote line cards OV This column indicates whether or not the remote line cards are operating in the OAM visible mode Oo Y The remote line card is in the OAM visible mode D Nor The fiber optic port on the local line card is not connected to a remote device or the operating mode of the remote device is not set to OAM visible 176 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 20 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description FIBER PORT or COPPER PORT ST This column displays the states of the twisted pair ports on the remote line cards Th
75. when you display the SNMPv3 Access Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 257 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table 258 This section contains a description of the SNMPv3 Group Table and how to create delete and modify table entries The SNMPv3 Group Table allows you to associate a User Name with a Group Name The User Name is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu while the Group Name is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu In addition the configuration in the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu defines which MIB views this User can read write modify and send traps from For each User Name you can assign D A Security Model SNMPv1 SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Oo A Group Name o A Storage Type To access the SNBMPv3 Group Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Group Table The Configure SNMPv3 Group Table menu is shown in Figure 117 A Configure SNMPv3 Group Table UN Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry Sa to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 117 Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Menu To access the SNMPv3 Group Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and
76. your network To stop the management card from sending any further event messages to the server enter 0 0 0 0 as the server address Select the Syslog Facility Code field and enter a facility code for the events The management card adds this code to the messages when it sends the messages to the syslog server The range is 0 to 23 The default is 1 The numerical codes are defined in the RFC 3164 standard To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System and All Line Card Configurations To configure the syslog client from the web browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Click the Syslog tab to display the tab in Figure 33 0 0 0 0 Administration General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics Help Figure 33 Syslog Tab 3 Click Edit to display the Syslog pop up window 105 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 106 4 Select the Syslog IP Address field and enter the IP address of the syslog server on your network To stop the management card from sending any further event messages to the server enter 0 0 0 0 as the server address To specify a facility code select Syslog Facility Code and enter a facility code for the events The management card adds this code to the messages when it sends the messages to the syslog server The range is 0 to 23 The default is 1 The numerical codes are defined in
77. 09 A Caution The loopback test is disruptive to network operations Local and remote line cards do not forward network traffic during the test Some network traffic may be lost 51 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 52 Dying Gasp Feature Dying gasp is a signal that AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV1203 Chassis transmit if the chassis has a power failure This feature can make it easier to identify power supply or power source problems at remote sites If a remote AT CV1203 Chassis loses power the AT CM Line Card in the chassis transmits the dying gasp signal from Port A over its fiber optic link to its line card counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis at the central office The local card sends the signal over the chassis backplane to the management card which enters the event in its event log and sends an SNMP trap to alert you to the problem Figure 7 illustrates the sequence of events of this feature card 1 The remote AT CV1203 Chassis loses power cUm 9e c e See 2 The remote AT CM Card Line Card sends the dying gasp signal to its local counterpart in the AT CV5000 Chassis 3 The local AT CM Line Card sends the signal over the backplane to the management 4 The management card enters the event in the event log and sends an SNMP trap
78. 1 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask DHCP 255 255 252 0 Edit o n tv E a Figure 23 System Tab 3 Click Edit in the IP Parameters section of the window to display the IP Parameters pop up window 4 To assign a static IP address configuration to the card enter the desired values in the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address fields Here are the guidelines for entering a static IP address configuration The values have to be entered in this format XXX XXX XXX XXX The DHCP client has to be disabled To delete a value without assigning a new value enter 0 0 0 0 Oo ua n The IP address configuration has to include a default gateway address if the management card will be communicating with network devices like a TFTP server or syslog server that are located on a different subnet This address should specify the first 83 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 84 hop to reaching the remote subnet and has to be a member of the same subnet as the card s IP address O The default values are 10 0 0 1 for the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 0 0 0 0 for the default gateway address 5 To activate the DHCP client so that the card obtains its IP address from a DHCP server on the network select Enable DHCP Or to deactivate the client so that you can assign the IP address manually select Disable DHCP Here are the guidelines to using the DHCP client O The 10 100Base TX port o
79. 100Base TX Port 22 To support those management functions that require communications with your network the management card comes with a standard 10 100Base TX Ethernet port which features IEEE 802 3u Auto Negotiation Those management functions that rely on this port are listed here Remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server 2 uuuuiu Pinging remote devices If the management card will be performing any of these task be sure to connect the 10 100Base TX Ethernet port to a network device such as an Ethernet switch AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide IP Address Configuration Event Log To support the functions listed in 10 100Base TX Port the management card has to be assigned an IP address configuration consisting of an IP address a subnet mask and possibly a default gateway address The management card can have only one IP address configuration The configuration can be assigned manually or supplied by a DHCP or BOOTP server on your network For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 80 Activity Monitor The management card has a log for recording operational events like the removal of line cards from a chassis or the loss of links on the ports on the media conver
80. 1503 1503 1504 through 1511 1511 1512 through 1519 1519 1520 through 1527 1527 1528 through 1536 1536 1537 through 1544 1544 1545 through 1552 1552 1553 through 1561 1561 1562 through 1569 1569 1570 through 1578 1578 1579 through 1587 1587 1588 through 1596 1596 1597 through 1605 1605 1606 through 1614 1614 1615 through 1623 1623 1624 through 1632 1632 1633 through 1642 1642 1643 through 1651 1651 1652 through 1661 1661 1662 through 1670 1670 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1671 through 1680 1680 1681 through 1690 1690 1691 through 1700 1700 1701 through 1710 1710 1711 through 1721 1721 1722 through 1731 1731 1732 through 1742 1742 1743 through 1752 1752 1753 through 1763 1763 1764 through 1774 1774 1775 through 1785 1785 1786 through 1796 1796 1797 through 1808 1808 1809 through 1819 1819 1820 through 1831 1831 1832 through 1843 1843 1844 through 1855 1855 1856 through 1867 1867 1868 through 1879 1879 1880 through 1892 1892 1893 through 1904 1904 1905 through 1917 1917 1918 through 1930 1930 1931 through 1943 1943 1944 through 1956 1956 1957 through 1970 1970 1971 through 1984 1984 1985 through 1998 1998 309 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 310 Table
81. 155 Last Saved Configuration Tab nee tem a a a nene eet 158 Show Port Statistics WindOw recen ie antenne dne drm d etin ted o aede eene adde nnde a HL entente iae ana 160 Port Statistics WindOW oett P REPREHENE ER HERPES HERREN ERE Ente edaria tatii ipii 161 eurem n 163 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window seesseeenenm emere nnne 165 Linecard Image Information Tabris cipsi ianiai esiin terii nennen inasi iiet 166 Line Card Module Information Window eessseee enne eme nennen nnne nnrren nennen nnne 167 Linecard Information WIDdOW 2 22 2 ioter eee aai dete dites eina dete eod e ai t dread sioe 169 SFP Information Window 1 2 treten ene tite Leere Ee ere eee loce redeo de erede eines 171 SEP Information Window 2 2 5 conten ceni Poner enter seen n exa ER utere a e pre Eden eed gir a c decns 171 SFP Information Tab initi ei Ed ec Ren eiu a seis E eiae tied evince eed roe an 172 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu sees enne nnne 174 Remote Module Configuration Menu sese nennen nnnm nennen senten nennen nnne 179 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Tab ssssssssee eene nenne enne nnnm nennen 182 Remote Module Status amp Configuration Page ssessessseseeenenen enne 183 Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version Window
82. 202 AT ee p C N212A 1 AT Pin ra CM212A 1 Pu tv102 BBBBRERHRB a aeeaa tatou AT C 102 Lk AT C 1 PWR ROY FLT xs ZW xa 3108NO2 coi ze 2 3 LIU LIU LIU SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML ML OAM SML i e e bet i BEA e lt i ej ML SML M Pu RESET Figure 49 Chassis View The Menu View shown in Figure 50 on page 134 lists all of the line cards in the chassis and displays the states of the links of their ports The information is this view is automatically refreshed every few seconds The columns in the table are described in Table 14 on page 134 To view or configure the parameters of the line cards or a management card click the model name of the card You can configure only one card at a time 133 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Chassis View Menu View Module Status Link A Link B Opmode O0AM al AT CV5M02 Online 10 2 AT CM202 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 3 AT CM202 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 4 AT CM202 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 5 AT CM202 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 6 AT CM2124 1 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 7 AT CM2124 1 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 8 AT CM212A 1 On Online 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 9 AT CM2124 1 On O
83. 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1999 through 2012 2012 2013 through 2026 2026 2027 through 2040 2040 2041 through 2055 2055 2056 through 2070 2070 2071 through 2085 2085 2086 through 2100 2100 2101 through 2116 2116 2117 through 2132 2132 2133 through 2148 2148 2149 through 2164 2164 2165 through 2181 2181 2182 through 2197 2197 2198 through 2214 2214 2215 through 2232 2232 2233 through 2249 2249 2250 through 2267 2267 2268 through 2285 2285 2286 through 2304 2304 2305 through 2322 2322 2323 through 2341 2341 2342 through 2361 2361 2362 through 2380 2380 2381 through 2400 2400 2401 through 2421 2421 2422 through 2442 2442 2443 through 2463 2463 2464 through 2484 2484 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 2485 through 2506 2506 2507 through 2528 2528 2529 through 2551 2551 2552 through 2574 2574 2575 through 2597 2597 2598 through 2621 2621 2622 through 2645 2645 2646 through 2670 2670 2671 through 2695 2695 2696 through 2721 2721 2722 through 2747 2747 2748 through 2773 2773 2774 through 2801 2801 2802 through 2828 2828 2829 through 2857 2857
84. 49 649 650 Same 651 and 652 652 653 Same 654 and 655 655 656 Same 657 and 658 658 659 659 660 and 661 661 662 662 663 and 664 664 665 and 666 666 667 667 668 and 669 669 670 670 671 and 672 672 299 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 300 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 673 673 674 and 675 675 676 and 677 677 678 678 679 and 680 680 681 681 682 and 683 683 684 and 685 685 686 686 687 and 688 688 689 and 690 690 691 691 692 and 693 693 694 and 695 695 696 696 697 and 698 698 699 and 700 700 710 and 702 702 703 703 705 and 705 705 706 and 707 707 708 708 709 and 710 710 711 and 712 712 713 and 714 714 715 and 716 716 718 and 719 719 720 and 721 721 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 722 and 723 723 724 and 725 725 726 and 727 727 728 728 729 and 730 730 731 and 732 732 733 and 734 734 735 and 736 736 737 and 738 738 739 and 740 740 741 and 742 742 743 and 744 744 745 745 746 and 747 747 748 and 749 749 750 and 751 751 752 and 753 753 754 and 755 755 756 and 757 757 758 and 7
85. 5 or 100 Mbps 2 kilometers 62 5 125 micron 1 24 miles multi mode Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 Mbps 100 meters 328 feet 40 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 2 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Type of Maximum Line Card Port Slot Connector Cable Speed Distance AT CV102 Fiber Optic Dual SC 50 125 or 100 Mbps 2 kilometers 62 5 125 micron 1 24 miles multi Mode Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 Mbps 100 meters 328 feet AT CV102 1 Fiber Optic Dual SC 9 125 micron 100 Mbps 40 kilometers single mode 24 8 miles Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 Mbps 100 meters 328 feet AT CV102 2 Fiber Optic Dual SC 9 125 micron 100 Mbps 15 kilometers single mode 9 4 miles Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 100 Mbps 100 meters 328 feet AT CV1KSS SFP1 Varies by SFP Varies by SFP 1 25 Gbps Varies by SFP transceiver transceiver transceiver SFP Varies by SFP Varies by SFP 1 25 Gbps Varies by SFP transceiver transceiver transceiver 1 SFP transceiver sold separately Note The maximum operating distances of the fiber optic ports assume full duplex operation The distances are significantly less for fiber optic ports in half duplex mode 41 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Operating Modes 42 Link Test Mode The AT CM Line Cards support these operating modes Link Test mode MissingLink mode Smart Missi
86. 59 759 760 and 761 761 762 and 763 763 764 and 765 765 766 and 767 767 768 through 768 768 769 and 770 770 771 and 772 772 773 and 774 774 301 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 302 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 775 and 776 776 777 and 778 778 779 and 780 780 781 and 782 782 783 and 784 784 785 through 787 787 788 and 789 789 790 and 791 791 792 and 793 793 794 and 795 795 796 through 798 798 799 and 800 800 801 and 802 802 803 and 804 804 805 through 807 807 808 and 809 809 810 and 811 811 812 through 814 814 815 and 816 816 817 and 818 818 819 through 821 821 822 and 823 823 824 and 825 825 826 through 828 828 829 and 830 830 831 and 832 832 833 through 835 835 836 and 837 837 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 838 to 840 840 841 and 842 842 843 through 845 845 846 and 847 847 851 and 852 852 853 through 855 855 856 through 858 858 859 and 860 860 861 through 863 863 864 and 865 865 866 through 868 868 869 through 871 871 872 and 873 873 874 through 876 876 877 through 879 879
87. 5M02 Management Card in the menu to display the Module Configuration Menu shown in Figure 34 on page 107 3 Select the Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default option 4 To save your changes in the master configuration file go to the Main Menu and select Configuration to display the Configuration menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To restore the default setting of Auto Negotiation on the 10 100Base TX port from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar 2 Inthe Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the management card The Port A tab for the management card is shown in Figure 37 on page 110 3 Select the General tab shown in Figure 27 on page 97 4 Click Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default Setting 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Restoring the Default Values on the AT CVSM02 Management Card Menus In this section are the procedures for restoring the default values to all of the following operating parameters on the AT CV5M02 Management Card uuuuuuuucl uu u suu u IP address configuration Name location and
88. 7 08 04 17 08 04 17 08 04 17 08 04 17 08 12 12 12 12 12 12 Converteon Activity Monitor Chit Return to resume the previous menu Module 5 has been removed Module 5 has been Installed Module 10 has been removed Module 10 has been Installed Power Tray A has been Installed Power Tray B has been removed k e Figure 32 Activity Monitor For the descriptions of the columns and messages refer to Table 8 on page 99 and Table 9 on page 100 4 To return to the Administration menu press Return 5 If you return to the Activity Monitor during the same management session the monitor displays those event messages that occurred in the interim If you start a new session the monitor displays those events that occurred since the start of the management session 6 To stop the activity monitor select Stop Activity Monitor The activity monitor is not supported in the web browser windows AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Syslog Client Menus Web Browser Syslog Syslog IP Address Syslog Facility Code For background information refer to Syslog Client on page 23 To configure the syslog client from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration to display the Administration Menu shown in Figure 28 on page 98 From the Administration Menu select the Syslog Server Address field and enter the IP address of the syslog server on
89. 79 through 23809 23809 23810 through 25974 25974 25975 through 28571 28571 28572 through 31746 31746 31747 through 35714 35714 35715 through 40816 40816 40817 through 47619 47619 47620 through 57142 57142 57143 through 71428 71428 71429 through 95238 95238 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 142858 through 250000 285714 315 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 316 Index Numerics 10 100Base TX port configuring 107 described 22 restoring default settings 112 A activity monitor described 23 displaying 104 AT CM Line Cards configuration files 29 configuring for dying gasp 230 configuring port settings 139 configuring remote port settings 180 184 configuring with remote peer management 174 182 default settings 288 described 36 displaying port settings 136 displaying remote port settings 180 184 downloading software with TFTP 275 downloading software with XMODEM 279 MAC addresses 167 naming 149 port statistics 160 remote version numbers 187 resetting 162 restoring configurations 30 restoring default settings 153 restoring last saved configuration 157 181 restoring last saved remote configuration 185 restoring remote default settings 180 185 serial numbers 167 status 128 version numbers 164 AT CM2KOS Line Card maximum frame size 150
90. 880 and 881 881 882 through 884 884 885 through 887 887 888 through 890 890 891 and 892 892 893 through 895 895 896 through 898 898 899 through 901 901 902 through 904 904 905 through 907 907 908 and 909 909 910 through 912 912 913 through 915 915 303 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 304 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 916 through 918 918 919 through 921 921 922 through 924 924 925 through 927 927 928 through 930 930 931 through 933 933 934 through 936 936 937 through 939 939 940 through 942 942 943 through 946 946 947 through 949 949 950 through 952 952 953 through 955 955 956 through 958 958 959 through 962 962 963 through 965 965 966 through 968 968 969 through 971 971 972 through 975 975 976 through 978 978 979 through 981 981 982 through 985 985 986 through 988 988 989 through 992 992 993 through 995 995 996 through 999 999 1000 through 1002 1002 1003 through 1006 1006 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1007 through 1009 1009 1010 through 1013 1013 1014 through 1016 1016 1017 t
91. 92 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5M02 Management Card sse nennen 196 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card ssseeen ene ene 199 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client sessseeeesssss 203 Configuring an OAM Client Men s det uen teriepeu itai PU EON Ioa tte ette dde feteteie ur er cele put deo ete Web Browse inrsin e e Ae eis ee ee i ee ee ee A GS Performing an OAM Loopback Test MID M lai ETE Displaying OAM Information for Local OAM Clients MIU EUM Web BrowSer m D Displaying OAM Information for Remote OAM Clients MS TMS cR ies WED BrOWSBF eer DN ERES NC ERE Ree PERRA ERRARE des saucerausccastees TE Displaying OAM Stalistlcs teda pq dene iate titen te beoe a a een eee ete eine Po Me re eet dede satan Menus eere reete Web BrowS r m diner Viewing MIB Variables with OAM Variable Requests MG MUS 2 sece EE Web Hci pel EPI Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp semen 229 Configuring the AT CM Line Cards irre idee deest ree ded eroi coe d a da eee au xd je ee pee als 230 Testing the Features taitaa etapat e seeds saab ede eaaa ae aaae ea
92. A035786071400012 A 7 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 71 62 A03578G071400225 A 8 AT CM212A 1 00 15 77 52 71 44 A03578G071400081 A 9 AT CM2124 1 00 15 77 52 71 15 AQ3578G0714001204 10 AT CV 102 FERRIER ERER EE A037136070500214 B 11 AT CV102 EESEESEESEESEESETI A037136G070500122 B 12 AT CV102 EF EE EESEESERIEE A037136070500152 B 13 AT CV102 FESFESIFESFE EE FEE A037136070500017 B 14 AT CV102 FF FF FFiFF FF FF A037136G070500222 B 15 Mot Inserted n 16 Not Inserted co 17 Mot Inserted zz 18 Mot Inserted ce Figure 72 Linecard Information Window 169 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Displaying SFP Module Information 170 Menus The procedures in this section are for viewing the manufacturer s specifications of the SFP modules in the AT CM2KOS and AT CM70S Line Cards To view SFP information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostic Menu shown in Figure 45 on page 121 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select SFP Information The following prompt is displayed Enter Linecard Slot Number gt 4 Enter the slot number of the AT CM2KOS or AT CM70S Line Card with the SFP module The following prompt is displayed Enter Linecard Port A or B gt 5 Enter the port of the SFP module An example of the SFP Inf
93. AM Client Parameters Parameter Description Admin State This parameter controls the state of the OAM client on the line card The possible values are O Enabled This enables the OAM client The line card can participate in the OAM Discovery process and perform other OAM functions This is the appropriate setting for the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards This is the default setting Disabled This disables the OAM client The line card cannot participate in the OAM Discovery process because it will not generate or respond to OAMPDUs 205 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 206 Table 25 OAM Client Parameters Parameter Description Mode Maximum OAMPDU Size This parameter specifies the mode of the OAM client on the line card The possible values are Passive This sets the client s mode to Passive Clients in the Passive mode can not initiate the Discovery process or send Loopback Control OAMPDUS or Variable Request OAMPDUS This is the default setting O Active This setting sets the client s mode to Active Clients in this mode can initiate the Discovery process This is the appropriate setting for the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards This parameter specifies the maximum size in octets of the OAMPDUS The OAM clients negotiate the maximum OAMPDU size during the discovery process If a client receives
94. At the confirmation prompt select Yes to return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values or No to cancel the procedure Restoring the Last Saved Configuration Saving the Parameter Settings AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide This procedure restores a remote line card to the last saved configuration in the master configuration file on the management card in the local chassis You might perform this procedure to discard any parameter changes that you made to a line card but did not saved or to configure a new line card with the save settings as its predecessor For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 Caution This procedure may disrupt network operations Some traffic may be lost 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Line Card Configuration 2 To view the parameter settings of the card s last saved configuration before activating them on the line card select Display Last Saved Configuration 3 To return the line card to its last saved configuration return to the Line Card Configuration menu and select Restore Last Saved Configuration 4 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to restore the settings or No to cancel the procedure Your changes to the parameter settings on remote AT CM Line Cards are automatically saved in the configuration files in flash memory and are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the cards are
95. Base TX Link State online Auto negotiate Manual negotiate gt Full Half Hundred Base 100Base TX Ten Base lt 10Base T gt Me Return to Module Management Menu n Figure 36 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card The parameters in the menu are described in Table 11 Table 11 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Cards Setting Description Auto negotiate Manual negotiate Full Half These selections are used to control the speed and duplex mode settings of the twisted pair port on the management cards The Auto negotiate setting the default setting activates IEEE 802 1u Auto Negotiation Hundred Base 100Base TX so that the speed and duplex mode of the port are Ten Base 10Base T established automatically Auto Negotiation is designed to ensure that the ports on the management card and the network device are operating at the same speed and that they are communicating at the highest possible common speed of the devices The Manual negotiate setting deactivates Auto Negotiation on a port so that you can set the parameters manually When you select this option additional settings are displayed in the menu The Full and Half settings control the duplex mode of the port which can be either full duplex or half duplex The Hundred Base and Ten Base selections set a port s speed to 100 or 10 Mbps respectively
96. Card Configuration tab 4 Select the Default Configuration tab shown in Figure 64 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration Current Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration Configuration Configuration Slot Number 14 Card Type CM202 Operation Mode OAM Visible Return to Default Configuration Default Configuration Port amp 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Auto negotiate Duplex MDI MDIX Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 64 Default Configuration Tab 155 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 156 This tab displays the line card s default settings To return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values click Return to Default Configuration The parameter settings on the line card are returned to their default settings and the Menu View is displayed A line card whose previous operating mode was OAM visible resumes normal network operations almost immediately However if the card s previous operating mode was not OAM visible it has to initialize its management software
97. Cards Menus To view the states of the ports on the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards in the chassis select Module Status and Configuration from the Main Menu The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 48 FK Module Status and Configuration UN Converteon MODULE INFO FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Mod_Name CardTypever ST OperMode IPC AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN 1 AT CV5M02 5 I 800 v300 100 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 N 0 0 Y 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N O 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N O 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 5 Area2a AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 6 Area2b AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 7 a121 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N O 0 00 100 N 0 0 Y 9 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 10 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 0 Y 11 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 12 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 13 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 14 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 15 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N
98. Configuring the AT CM Line Cards on page 230 0 Testing the Feature on page 235 For background information refer to Dying Gasp Feature on page 52 229 Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp Configuring the AT CM Line Cards 230 This procedure explains how to configure the settings of the AT CM Line Cards for the dying gasp feature The procedure has you do the following o Verify the hardware version numbers of the line cards 0 Verify the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software on the line cards O Set the operating modes of the line cards to OAM visible O Set the OAM operating mode of the fiber optic ports on the line cards to active You have to perform this procedure at a managed Converteon chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card The AT CM Line Cards that will be deployed in the unmanaged AT CV1203 Chassis at the remote sites have to be configured in a managed chassis before they are installed in the AT CV1203 Chassis The following procedure uses the menus to configure the line cards You can also perform the procedure from the web browser windows To verify and configure the AT CM Line Card for the dying gasp feature from the menus 1 Install the AT CM Line Card in the AT CV5000 Chassis that has the AT CV5MO02 Management Card 2 Start a local management session on the chassis 3 From the Main Menu select Administration gt Diagnostics gt Line Card Im
99. Converteon Family Management Software AT S73 and AT S99 User s Guide CONVERTEON Family Media Converter Products AT S73 Version 3 0 0 Management Software for the AT CM Media Converter Line Card Series AT S99 Version 3 0 0 Management Software for the AT CV5M02 Management Card Allied Telesis 613 001017 RevA Copyright 2008 Allied Telesis Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced without prior written permission from Allied Telesis Inc Allied Telesis is a trademark of Allied Telesis Inc Microsoft and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other product names company names logos or other designations mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Allied Telesis Inc reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without prior written notice The information provided herein is subject to change without notice In no event shall Allied Telesis Inc be liable for any incidental special indirect or consequential damages whatsoever including but not limited to lost profits arising out of or related to this manual or the information contained herein even if Allied Telesis Inc has been advised of known or should have known the possibility of such damages Contents Preface e
100. Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry N Resum to SNMPv3 Configurations m Figure 119 Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Menu To access the SNMPv3 Notify Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Notify Table tab The tab is shown in Figure 122 261 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 System Configuration SMMPvi amp SNMPv2 SNMP3 General Access Notif Table d User View Group Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type Figure 120 SNMPv3 Notify Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Notify Table entries are defined in Table 32 Table 32 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters Parameter Description Notify Name Notify Tag The name to be associated with this trap message The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters For example you might define a trap message for hardware engineering and enter a value of hardwareengineeringtrap for the Notify Name The name of a Notify Tag The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters This parameter is added to the Tag List parameter in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table which defines the IP addresses of the devices to receive the traps or inform messages Notify Type The possible values are T Trap This option sends traps SNMPv3 does no
101. E ete one va 213 Show Local OAM Information WindOw isseseeeeeene eene mene nnnm en nennen nene 215 OAM Local Information Fabie inusitada rede de cota ecd decre dde oie deed ec ee xn dedere dede cs 220 Show Remote OAM Information Window sseesseee nennen nene en nene nre eere 221 Remote OAM Information Tab aeterne entrent tenerte kd aged uode din aaNet 222 Show OAM Statistics Window esses emen nnnm nnn en nee enne en nennen erre 223 OAM Esc NEL TaN 224 Enter Branch Number Prompt tuens 225 Enter Leaf Number Prompt urere a nui iet ken phe a lbs lec sanie era Ee p e D e cese ee oa 226 OAM Variable Request Tab cc cccccesccececeeeeecececeeeeeaee eee cgaeaeeee ca aeaeceeeqeeaaeceseeeaaaeaeseeeeaeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeseeneaeees 226 Line Card Module Software Image Version Hardware Version Numbers eee 231 Line Card Module Software Image Version AT S73 Version Numbers eeee 232 Module Status and Configuration Menu sssseeeneeeeneeee nennen nennen ener nre nennen nene 232 Wm cce ieee 240 SNMPv3 User Configuration Process sssssseseseeeeeneeenneeen nennen ennemi enne nenne 242 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Fi
102. IP address of the TFTP server on your network select the TFTP Server IP Address field and enter the IP address In the File Name fields enter the filenames of the new image files of the management software that you obtained from the Allied Telesis web site and stored on your TFTP server You do not have to enter filenames for all of the fields Rather enter the filenames for just those line cards you want to upgrade The fields are defined here 273 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files 6 7 Management Card Image File Name This field is for the image filename of the AT S99 Management Software for the AT CV5M02 Management Card Be sure to include the img extension AT CM2x2 Image File Name This field is for the image filename of the AT S73 Management Software for the following line cards AT CM201 AT CM202 AT CM202 1 AT CM202 2 AT CM212A 1 and AT CM212B 1 All of these line cards use the same image file Be sure to include the img extension AT CM2Kx Image File Name This field is for the image filename of the AT S73 Management Software for the AT CM2KOS Line Card Be sure to include the img extension AT CM70x Image File Name This field is for the image filename of the AT S73 Management Software for the AT CM7OS Line Card Be sure to include the img extension Linecard Bootloader Image File Name This field is for the filename of the bootloader for the AT CM Line Cards All of the AT CM Line Car
103. Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 4843 through 4926 4926 4927 through 5012 5012 5013 through 5102 5102 5103 through 5194 5194 5195 through 5291 5291 5292 through 5390 5390 5391 through 5494 5494 5495 through 5602 5602 5603 through 5714 5714 5715 through 5830 5830 5831 through 5952 5952 5953 through 6079 6079 6080 through 6211 6211 6212 through 6349 6349 6350 through 6493 6493 6494 through 6644 6644 6645 through 6802 6802 6803 through 6968 5958 6969 through 7142 7142 7143 through 7326 7326 7327 through 7518 7518 7519 through 7722 7722 7723 through 7936 7936 7937 through 8163 8163 8164 through 8403 8403 8404 through 8658 8658 8659 through 8928 8928 8929 through 9216 9216 313 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 314 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 9217 through 9523 9523 9524 through 9852 9852 9853 through 10204 10204 10205 through 10582 10582 10583 through 10989 10989 10990 through 11428 11428 11429 through 11904 11904 11905 through 12422 12422 12423 through 12987 12987 12988 through 13605 13605 13606 through 14285 14285 14286 through 15037 15037 15038 through 15873 15873 15874 through 16806 16806 16807 through 17857 17857 17858 through 19047 19047 19048 through 20408 20408 20409 through 21978 21978 219
104. Line Card Configuration tab 2 Click the Default Configuration tab This tab displays the default settings for the line card An example of the tab is shown in Figure 64 on page 155 3 To return the card s parameter settings to the default values click the Return to Default Configuration button The parameter settings on the card are returned to the default settings This procedure restores a remote line card to the last saved configuration in the master configuration file on the management card in the local chassis You might perform this procedure to discard any parameter changes that you made to a line card but did not saved or to configure a new line card with the save settings as its predecessor For more information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 Caution This procedure may disrupt network operations Some traffic may be lost 1 From the Remote Module Status amp Configuration window select the Line Card Configuration tab 2 Select the Last Saved Configuration tab 3 To return the line card to its last saved configuration click the Restore to Last Saved Configuration button 185 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 186 Saving the Parameter Settings Your changes to the parameter settings on remote AT CM Line Cards are automatically saved in the configuration files in flash memory and are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the cards are
105. Line Cards 4 Click the Port Configuration tab to display the current settings of the port The example in Figure 56 is from Port B the twisted pair port on a line card Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Line Card Configuration Setting Port Port Port Status Configuration Statistics Slot Number 7 Card Type CM202 Port Status Port State Enable Flow Control Enable Link Status Online Negotiation Auto Speed 100M Duplex Full Crossover Auto Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egrees Rate Limit No Limit 144 Figure 56 Port Configuration Window 5 To adjust the settings click Edit to display the Port Configuration pop up window 6 Adjust the parameters as needed The parameters are defined in Table 16 on page 141 7 Click Update The new parameter settings take affect immediately on the port 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Setting the Operating Mode For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 42 A Caution This procedure resets a line card disrupting its normal operations Some network traffic may be lost When an AT CM Line Card is reset it immediately resumes forwarding network traffic However it uses the default values for its para
106. Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting For instructions on setting this parameter refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on AT CM Line Cards on page 139 This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards OAM This column applies only to AT CM Line Cards operating in the OAM visible or the OAM bypass mode It displays the following OAM client information 00 C 131 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 13 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description OAM Continued A This displays the operational state of the OAM client on Port A the fiber optic port on a line card The possible states are Operational A Active Send Local D Disabled L Active Send Local M Peer Remote Reject P or W Passive Wait R Peer Local Reject 1 Active Send Remote 1 2 Active Send Remote 2 This alternates between and o when the port is transmitting OAMPDUs Otherwise it remains o This alternates between and o when the port is receiving OAMPDUs Otherwise it remains o Note To support the OAM based features the AT CM Line Cards have to be in the OAM operational state Achieving this state can take a line card up to two minutes when it is powered on or reset because it has to initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM sta
107. Management Card D Transmit Data Normally default o Transmit All Ones Menu selections from the Console Port on the AT CM70S Line Card Normal default Unframed All Ones PRBS Enable Disable default Enable Disable default Remote Loopback Enable Disable default o2 u uauluu Enable Disable default uu uauluu 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration 198 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the Console Port on the Line Card This procedure explains how to configure the settings on the T1 E1 ports on the AT CM70S Line Card from the card s Console port This is the appropriate procedure to perform when the card s UART setting is set to UART local console mode and the chassis containing the line card does not have a management card A Caution The Console port on the AT CM70S Line Card does not have any security features like logon usernames or passwords Anyone with physical access to the location of the card may alter the configuration settings of the T1 E1 ports on the device The card and its chassis should be installed in a secure location such as a locked wiring closet to protect against unauthorized changes to its operating parameters Note The parameter settings of the SFP s
108. Management Card The possible states are O Online The port has established a link to a network device The speed of the port in included O Offline The port has not established a link to a network device Link A This column displays the states of Port B on the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards The cable medium of Port B fiber optic or twisted pair copper will depend on the line card The possible states are O Online The port has established a link to a network device This state includes the speed of the port O Offline The port has not established a link to a network device OpMode OAM u uuu m m o2 uuuuiuiu This column displays the operating modes of the line cards The possible modes are Link Test MissingLink Smart MissingLink OAM Visible OAM Bypass For AT CM Line Cards that are operating in the OAM visible mode this column also includes the state of the OAM client on Port A the fiber optic port The possible OAM states are Operational Disabled Passive Wait Active Send Local Active Send Remote 1 Active Send Remote 2 Peer Local Reject Peer Remote Reject The AT CM Line Cards have to be in the OAM operational state to support the OAM based features Achieving this state can take a line card up to two minutes when it is powered on or reset because it has to initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM state with its remote counterpart 135 Chapte
109. Management Card was reset CV1203 Local RPS Failure A B AT CV1203 Report One of the two external power supplies connected to the AT CV1203 Chassis failed A failed power supply has no detectable output voltages A and B designate the power connectors on the back panel of the chassis This message only appears if the AT CV1203 Chassis has two power supplies and just one of the power supplies fails Clear A power supply connected to the AT CV1203 Chassis resumed normal operations or was replaced 100 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 9 Event Log Messages Message Chassis Classi fication Definition CV1203 RPS Failure on Remote Line Card n AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report The media converter line card in slot n of the AT CV5000 Chassis received a report from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV1203 Chassis that one of the two power supplies connected to the remote chassis lost power This message requires remote peer management For background information refer to Dying Gasp Feature on page 52 For instructions on how to configure the line cards for this feature refer to Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp on page 229 If a remote AT CV1203 Chassis loses all power and has at least one AT CM Media Converter Line Card it sends the dying gasp signal instead of this signal Clear The media converte
110. Management Software User s Guide Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis Menus In this section are procedures for displaying operational information about the power supplies and fans in the chassis The information also includes information about the management card including its MAC address and the states of the flash memory and the Console port Note These procedures do not perform any diagnostic utilities and are not disruptive to the operations of the management card or the line cards in the chassis To view general information about the chassis from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 From the Administration Menu select Diagnostics The Diagnostics Menu is shown in Figure 45 2 Diagnostics Menu TN Converteon Chassis Diagnostics Line Card Image Version Remote Line Card Image Version Line Card Information SFP Information preturi to Administration Menu P Figure 45 Diagnostics Menu From the Diagnostics Menu select Chassis Diagnostics to display the Chassis Diagnostics Menu The example in Figure 46 is from the AT CV5000 Chassis The windows for the AT CV1200 Chassis and the AT CV1203 Chassis do not include power supply information The information in this window is for viewing purposes only 121 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card a Serial Number A02736 MAC Address 00
111. Port Status Port Port Configuration Statistics Slot Number Module AT CM202 Port Statistics Received Packets 0 Transmitted Packets 0 CRC Errors 4 Collisions 2736 Clear Port Statistics Figure 67 Port Statistics Window The port statistics are described in Table 17 on page 160 161 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Resetting Media Converter Line Cards 162 Menus The procedures in this section are used to reset all of the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards in a Converteon chassis You might reset the cards if they are experiencing a problem A Caution These procedures may be disruptive to the operations of your network Some network traffic may be lost The AT CM Line Cards immediately resume forwarding network traffic after they are reset but they use the default values for their parameter settings while they initialize their management software a process that takes approximately one minute to complete Afterwards they configure their operating parameters according to the settings in their configuration files or the settings received from the management card in the chassis Because they do not have management software the AT CV Line Cards immediately return to normal operations after a reset You cannot reset individual media converter cards in a chassis These procedures do not affect the AT CV5M02 Management Card For instructions on how to reset the m
112. S 70918 Tx Event OAMPDUS Rx Unique Event OAMPDUS Rx Duplicate Event OAMPDUS Tx Loopback Control OAMPDUS Rx Loopback Control OAMPDUS Tx Variable Request OAMPDUS Rx Variable Request OAMPDUS Tx Variable Response OAMPDUS Rx Variable Response OAMPDUS Tx Organizational Specific OAMPDUS Rx Organizational Specific OAMPDUS Rx Unsupported OAMPDUS eo OcOOOoOcoccococccococoo NL Return to OAM Configurations E Figure 100 Show OAM Statistics Window 223 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Refer to the IEEE 802 3ah standard for definitions of the different types of OAMPDUs Web Browser To display OAM statistics for local OAM clients from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A on the AT CM Line Card whose OAM statistics you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Statistics tab to display the window in Figure 101 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Operation Mode Line Card Configuration Port ort Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 11 Module AT CM202 OAM S
113. Support Yes Event Support NO variable Support Yes Unidirect Support Yes S Return to OAM Configurations E Figure 98 Show Remote OAM Information Window 221 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client This window is for viewing purposes only Refer to Table 26 on page 215 for definitions of the items in the window Web Browser To display OAM status information about remote OAM clients from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card that is connected to the remote OAM device whose status information you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Information tab to display the tab in Figure 97 on page 220 5 Click the Remote OAM Information tab to display the tab in Figure 99 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Operation Mode Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 11 Module AT CM202 Local OAM Information Remote OAM Information MAC Address 00 0c 46 ce de dc MUX State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering No Lo
114. T Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session 21 Return to the line card s Module Configuration Menu 22 To configure other parameters on the line card refer to Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 127 23 Return to the Main Menu and select Configuration 24 From the Configuration menu select Save System and All Line Card Configurations 25 You can now remove the line card from the slot 26 To assign the same configuration to another AT CM Line Card install the card in the same slot Wait a full minute for the line card to initialize its management software and to receive its parameter settings from the management card Afterwards remove the card Repeat this step to assign the same settings to other AT CM Line Cards 78 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card This chapter has the following sections Ooaooaogoaogod dvoaoeouauaaudauadau u Q o2 uuuiuouiu Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 80 Assigning a Name on page 85 Assigning Contact and Location Information on page 86 Configuring the SNMP Community Strings on page 88 Specifying the IP Addresses of SNMP Trap Receivers on page 89 Configuring Management Security on page 90 Manually Setting the Date and Time on page 93 Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client on page 95 Resetting the Management Card on page 96 Viewing the Event Log on page 98 Viewing the Activ
115. Table Parameters ssssssseeeeeen emere eren nnne 268 Default Settings for the AT S99 Management Software sse eene 287 Default Settings for the AT S73 Management Software sss emere 288 Rate Limits Eq ivalents 321i eii oer Ene tecta cou tec ete Ere ele oe ee nee iuh pesi bita ke eut see east a eee tuf Qantas fx 298 13 Tables Preface This is the management guide for the Converteon product line of media converter line cards and management card In this guide you ll learn about the features of the AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards and the AT CV5M02 Management Card and how to monitor and configure the devices from the menus and the web browser windows in the AT S99 Management Software on the management card This preface contains the following sections o Where to Find Web based Guides on page 16 0 Contacting Allied Telesis on page 17 Preface Where to Find Web based Guides The installation and user guides for all of the Allied Telesis products are available for viewing in portable document format PDF from our web site at www alliedtelesis com AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Contacting Allied Telesis Online Support Email and Telephone Support Returning Products Sales and Corporate Information Warranty This section provides Allied Telesis contact information for technical support and for sales and corpora
116. access When you want to permit a user to access a MIB view you include a particular view When you want to deny a user access to a MIB view you exclude a particular view After you specify a MIB subtree view you have the option of further restricting a view by defining a subtree mask The relationship between a MIB subtree view and a subtree mask is analogous to the relationship between an IP address and a subnet mask The switch uses the subnet mask to determine which portion of an IP address represents the network SNMPv3 Storage Types SNMPv3 Message Notification AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide address and which portion represents the node address In a similar way the subtree mask further refines the subtree view and enables you to restrict a MIB view to a specific row of the OID MIB table You need a thorough understanding of the OID MIB table to define a subtree mask Each SNMPv3 table entry has its own storage type You can choose between nonvolatile storage which allows you to save the table entry or volatile storage which does not allow you to save an entry If you select the volatile storage type when you power off the switch your SNMPv3 configuration is lost and cannot be recovered At each SNMPv3 menu you are prompted to configure a storage type You do not have to configure the same storage type value for each table entry When you generate an SNMPv3 message from the switch there are three basic
117. adjust the settings as needed The parameters are defined in Table 25 OAM Client Parameters on page 205 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file click the Line Card Configuration tab the Current Configuration tab and the Save Current Configuration button AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Performing an OAM Loopback Test Menus For background information refer to OAM Loopback Tests on page 51 To perform the OAM loopback test from the menus A Caution This test is disruptive to network operations Some network traffic may be lost The local and remote media converter line cards do not forward network traffic during the test 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 Select the local AT CM Line Card you want to perform the loopback test This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example of the menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 3 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 on page 140 4 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu in Figure 89 on page 204 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select OAM Loopback Test to display the OAM Loopback Test Menu shown in Figure 92 a OAM Loopback Test TAS Module 11 Port 1 Enable
118. age Version 4 Examine the hardware version number of the AT CM Line Card The version numbers are displayed as extensions of the model names like v2 Refer to Table 27 for the supported hardware versions Line cards without a version number do not support the dying gasp feature AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Line card hardware version number a Line Card Module Software Image Version Converteon Module App Ver BootLdr Ver 1 AT CV5M02 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 lt Area2a AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 E Figure 105 Line Card Module Software Image Version Hardware Version Numbers Table 27 Version Numbers of AT CM Line Cards that Support the Dying Gasp Feature Media Converter Line Card New Hardware Version AT CM201 Version 2 AT CM202 Version 2 AT CM202 1 Version 2 AT CM202 2 Version 2 AT CM212A 1 Version 2 AT CM212B 1 Version 2 AT CM70S Version 2 AT CM2KOS Version 3 5 In the same window check the version number of the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM Line Card It should be Version 2 0 1 or later Earlier versions do not support this feature 231 Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp 232 AT S73 Management Software Version Number Line Card Module Software Image Version Converteo M
119. agement Cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis These commands are located in the Management Card Redundancy menu and tab shown in Figure 17 and Figure 18 respectively Management Card Redundancy Menu CN Switch Over Management Cards Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card Save Current Configuration of Standby Card Return to Administration Menu NE Figure 17 Management Card Redundancy Menu Help Switch over management cards Copy active card configuration to standby card Save current configuration of standby card Select Figure 18 Management Card Redundancy Tab 67 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session 68 The functions of these commands are given here O Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card This command copies the temporary master configuration file from DRAM in the active management card to DRAM in the standby card O Save Current Configuration of Standby Card This command instructs the standby card to copy its master configuration file from DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage You use these commands to manually copy the master configuration file from the active management card to the standby card and to store the file in the standby card s flash memory However there is little likelihood you ll ever need to use these commands because the active and standby cards do this automatically The only time you might be inclined to use them is if you suspect tha
120. agement card is reset or powered off To manually set the management card s date and time from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration This displays the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 From the System Configuration Menu select System Clock Configuration to display the menu in Figure 26 a System Clock Menu ON System Date mm dd yy 00 00 00 System Time hh mm ss 00 17 00 NTP Server 0 0 0 0 gt Disable NTP Enable NTP Sica to System Configuration Menu E Figure 26 System Clock Menu To set the date select System Date mm dd yy and enter a new value in the format mm dd yy format For example here is April 5 2008 4 5 08 To set the system time select System Time hh mm ss and enter a new value in 24 hour hh mm ss format The seconds are optional Each part requires two digits For example 8 15 a m would be 8 15 93 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 94 Web Browser To manually set the date and time from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Configuration from the left menu bar If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 To manually set the date and time click Edit in the System Information section of the tab In the popup window select System Date and en
121. also let you configure the additional features on the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards such as port filters and OAM based features The AT CV5M01 and AT CV5MO2 Management Cards have simple to use menus and support both local out of band management through a serial RS 232 Console port and remote in band management from a Telnet client The AT CV5MO02 Card also supports remote web browser management AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide AT CV5MO01 and AT CV5M02 Management Cards The AT CV5MO02 Management Card and its predecessor the AT CV5MO1 Management Card support many of the same features and management functions Both cards let you locally or remotely monitor the status of the AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards configure the operating modes of the line cards and adjust the port parameters and the OAM based features on the AT CM Line Cards The two management cards share the features listed here g M u uuu Local out of band management through an RS 232 Console port Remote in band management using the card s Telnet server from clients on your network Easy to use menus Event log for viewing operational messages about the line cards Activity monitor for viewing the event messages in real time Syslog client for storing the event messages on a syslog server on your network Network Time Protocol NTP client for setting the card s date and time from an NTP server on your network or
122. alue to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv3 protocol The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure the group to authenticate SNMPv3 entities users and encrypt messages Security Level The possible values are A AuthNoPriv This option represents authentication but no privacy protocol Select this security level if you want to authenticate SNMP users but you do not want to encrypt messages using a privacy protocol You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol P AuthPriv This option represents authentication and the privacy protocol Select this security level to encrypt messages using a privacy protocol and authenticate SNMP entities This level provides the greatest level of security You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol N NoauthNoPriv This option represents no authentication and no privacy protocol Select this security level if you do not want to authenticate SNMP entities and you do not want to encrypt messages using a privacy protocol This security level provides the least security Note The only security level for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c is N NoauthNoPriv 256 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 30
123. an Information OAMPDU from its OAM counterpart with a different value for the maximum OAMPDU size it uses the smaller value For instance if during the Discovery process a client receives an Information OAMPDU from its remote OAM counterpart that has a smaller value for the maximum OAMPDU size than its own value the client uses the remote client s value The range of this value is 64 to 1518 octets The default value is 1518 octets Unidirec tional Support This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client sends OAMPDwUs if the receiver connector on the fiber optic port of Port A is not receiving a signal or network traffic The possible values are C Yes The OAM client sends OAMPDUS even when the receive fiber optic connector on the fiber optic port on port A is not receiving a signal or network traffic This is the default setting O No The OAM client sends OAMPDUS only when the receive fiber optic connector on the fiber optic port on port A is receiving a signal or network traffic and the port has established a link with its remote counterpart AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 25 OAM Client Parameters Parameter Description Loopback This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client Support on the line card can participate in OAM loopback tests by returning test packets received on port A from another OAM client This parameter applies only to OAM clients th
124. anagement Card sss nennen nene nennen ener neesii kaadaa nennen 110 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card sse nennen nnnm nennen 111 Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu sss enne nene rren nene enne nes 115 Management Card Redundancy Menu sssssssssseeeee ener ennemi enn nennen nen nnns 117 Confirmation Prompt for Switch Over Management Cards sssssssse eene eem eere 117 Management Card Redundancy Tab sssssssssseeseeee nennen eene enne en neret nennen nennen 118 Terminal Configuration Mend 3 2 reris itd ace ee rit eroi de ego ati e a decided te ce xo dicatus tastes 119 Terminal Data Rate Menu 120 DiaQnosticS dU ESAE mM TM 121 Chassis Diagnostics Menu 2 Ie a Hee De dece de deis e i HR eoe bd gebe qe oec sued does 122 ChassiS Diagnostics Jab 4 oie Ute a UR tate Ote une e eines tlet ines ds d laa 124 Module Status and Configuration Menu ssssseee eene nennen ennemi rennen rnnt nennen 128 Chassis VIeW eter eR RUE RM HERE ERRARE PO RNV NR deep Rage 133 Figures Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75
125. anagement card refer to Resetting the Management Card on page 96 To reset all of the media converter line cards in the chassis from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Reset Chassis and Restart Line Cards 3 Atthe confirmation prompt select Yes to reset all of the media converter line cards or No to cancel the procedure If you choose Yes the following message is displayed The chassis will reset when FLASH writes are complete Afterwards the Administration Menu is displayed again 4 To monitor the status of the AT CM Line Cards return to the Main Menu and select Module Status and Configuration When a line card has completed the reset process its status changes to On AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Web Browser To reset all of the media converter line cards in the chassis from the web browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 If the General tab shown in Figure 68 is not selected select it Administration General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics Help Reset Chassis and Line Cards s Figure 68 General tab 3 Inthe Reset Chassis and Line Cards section of the window select Yes from the pull down menu and click Apply 4 To monitor the status of the AT CM Line Cards select the Menu View from Module Status amp Configuration A line car
126. arameters are defined in Table 33 on page 265 To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu is shown in Figure 121 di Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table ON Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry Hain to SNMPv3 Configurations J Figure 121 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu 264 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Target Address Table tab The Target Address Table tab is shown in Figure 122 System Configuration General SNMPvi1 amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Target Address Name TDomain TAddress UDP Port Timeout Retries Tag List Parameters Storage Type Figure 122 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Tab Table 33 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters Parameter Description Target Address Name The name of the SNMP manager or host that manages the SNMP activity on your switch The name can be up to 32 alphanume
127. as shown in Figure 9 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards start the session on the active management card identified by its green RDY LED Figure 9 Connecting the Management Cable to the Management Card s Console Port 2 Connect the other end of the cable to an RS 232 port on a terminal or a PC with a terminal emulator program 3 Configure the terminal or the terminal emulation program as follows Bits per second 115200 default range 2400 to 115200 bps Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None u uuu iu AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 4 When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account on the management card The manager account has the username manager and the default password friend The operator account has the username operator and the default password of operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive For further information refer to Manager and Operator Accounts on page 24 For instructions on how to change a password refer to Configuring Management Security on page 90 After you log on the Main Menu in Figure 10 is displayed on your screen x Allied Telesis AT CV5M02 Management Module Software E AT CV5000 AC Main Menu Module Status and Configuration Remote Module Status and Configuration Administration Image Download Configuration Management Card Redundancy edi 5 Figur
128. at return the test packets It has no affect on OAM clients that generate the test packets For information on this feature refer to Performing an OAM Loopback Test on page 209 The possible values are o Yes The OAM client can return test packets from OAM loopback tests This is the default setting o No The OAM client cannot return test packets Link Event This parameter is not implemented in this release Support Variable This parameter controls whether or not the OAM client Retrieval on the line card can respond to variable retrieval Support requests from other OAM clients A variable retrieval request is a query of an OAM client by another OAM client for the current value of a MIB object The possible values are Yes The OAM client can respond to variable retrieval requests This is the default setting No The OAM client cannot respond to variable retrieval requests Note The AT CM Line Cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable retrieval requests can access As a result the line cards will never return a MIB value in response to a variable retrieval request from an OAM client such as another AT CM Line Card 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration Alternatively return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System and
129. ation You use the SNMPv3 Community Table to configure SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 communities Due to the complexity of the SNMPv3 configuration Allied Telesis recommends that you configure the SNMPv3 protocol with the procedures listed above in the order they are listed However you can configure the SNMPv3 protocol using the above procedures in any order 24T Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 User Table entries The parameters are User Name Authentication protocol Authentication password Privacy protocol u uuu iu Privacy password To manage the SNMPv3 User Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 User Table The Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu is shown in Figure 111 i Configure SNMPv3 User Table VAN Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry NReturn to SNMPv3 Configurations M Figure 111 Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu To manage the SNMPv3 User Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the User Table tab The SNMPv3 User Table tab is shown in Figure 112 248 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuration System gt m
130. ation Prompt for Switch Over Management Cards 3 Choose Yes to activate the switchover or No to cancel the procedure If you select Yes your management session ends as the active and standby management cards change states 117 Cha pter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 4 To resume managing the chassis wait twenty to thirty seconds for the standby card to transition to the active state and afterwards start a new management session Note For explanations of the two other selections in the Management Card Redundancy menu refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 Web Browser To activate the standby management card from the web browser windows 1 Select Management Card Redundancy from the menu bar to display the tab in Figure 42 Management Card Redundancy Help Switch over management cards Copy active card configuration to standby card Save current configuration of standby card 118 Figure 42 Management Card Redundancy Tab 2 Inthe section Switch Over Management Cards click Select A confirmation prompt is displayed 3 Inthe confirmation prompt click Yes and Apply to activate the standby card or No and Apply to cancel the procedure If you select Yes your management session ends as the active and standby management cards change states 4 To resume managing the chassis wait twenty to thirty seconds for the standby card to transition to the active state Afterwar
131. ation for Remote OAM Clients The procedures in this section are used to view OAM status information on remote OAM clients connected to local AT CM Line Cards Note These procedures require that the local and remote AT CM Line Cards be set to the OAM visible mode Menus To display status information for remote OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 Select the local card that is connected to the remote OAM device whose status information you want to view The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 3 Select Port A the fiber optic port to display the Port Management Menu in Figure 54 on page 140 OAM is only supported on port A 4 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu shown in Figure 89 on page 204 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Show Remote OAM Information to display the Show Remote OAM Information window shown in Figure 98 a Show Remote OAM Information CN Module 11 Port A MAC Address 00 0c 46 9a 21 c9 Mux State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering Yes Local Stable NO Remote Discovering No Remote Stable No Critical Event No Dying Gasp No Link Fault No OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0003 vendor Info 0x00160001 vendor OUI 00 30 84 Mode Active Max OAMPDU Size 1518 Loopback
132. ault notification is that some network devices such as managed Fast Ethernet switches can respond to the loss of a link on a port by performing a specific action For example the network device might send a trap to a network management station and so alert the network administrator of the problem Or if the device is running a spanning tree protocol it might seek a redundant path to a disconnected node Here is an example of how the MissingLink mode works Assume that the two ports on a media converter line card are connected to two Fast Ethernet switches one local and the other remote Switch A the remote switch is connected to port A on the line card while Switch B the local device is connected to port B If the link to Switch A is lost the line card disables the transmitter on port B to signal Switch B of the loss of the link to Switch A This notifies Switch B of the problem so it too along with Switch A can take remedial action such as activating a redundant path if it is running a spanning tree protocol or sending an SNMP trap to a management workstation Without the MissingLink mode switch B would be unaware of the problem because it would still have a valid link to the media converter line card In the example the initial loss occurred on port A But the operating mode operates the same when the initial loss of the link is on port B Here the transmitter on port A is disabled to notify the node connected to that port of the
133. b browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Select the Diagnostics tab 3 Select the Linecard Image Information tab shown in Figure 70 The columns in the window are described in Table 18 on page 165 Administration Administration gt Diagnostics General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics panastis Linecard Tinaga erte ee ud M Module Application Version Bootloader Version 1 AT CV5M02 v3 0 0 2 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 5 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 6 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 7 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 8 AT CM2124 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 9 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 10 AT CV102 Not Available Not Available 11 AT CV102 Not Available Not Available 12 AT CV102 Not Available Not Available 13 AT CV102 Not Available Not Available 14 AT CV102 Not Available Not Available 15 Not Inserted 16 Not Inserted 17 Not Inserted 18 Not Inserted Figure 70 Linecard Image Information Tab AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers This section has procedures that explain how to display the MAC addresses and serial numbers of the cards in the chassis You may be asked to provide this information in the event you contact Allied Telesis for technical assistance Menus To view the information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration
134. btree Mask ff View Type Included Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Group Name grpmanager Context Prefix Security Model usm Security Level AuthNoPriv Context Match Prefix Read View Name viewUSMmanager Write View Name viewUSMmanager Notify View Name viewUSMmanager Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Security Name commpublic Security Model v1 Group Name grpcommpublic Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Notify Name sysadminTrap Notify Tag sysadminTag Notify Type Trap Storage Type Nonvolatile SNMPv3 Operator Configuration AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Target Address Name host408 Ip Address 198 35 11 1 UDP Port 162 Timeout 1500 Retries 3 Tag List sysadminTag Target Parameters SNMPmgrPC Storage Type NonVvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Target Parameters Name SNMPmanagerPC User Security Name systemadmin24 Security Model v3 Security Level P AuthPriv Storage Type Nonvolatile This section provides a sample configuration for an Operator with a User Name of atiengr77 Since this user will only send messages to a group and not an SNMP host you do not need to configure message notification for this user Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu User Name atiengr77 Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol None Storage Typ
135. button 159 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Displaying Port Statistics 160 Menus To display traffic statistics for the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 4 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 Select the AT CM Line Card whose statistics you want to view An example of the Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 Select a port You can select only one port The Port Management Menu is shown in Figure 54 on page 140 Select Port Configuration The Port Configuration Menu for the port is shown in Figure 55 on page 141 From the Port Management Menu select Port Statistics The example Show Port Statistics window in Figure 66 is from the AT CM2KOS Line Card All other AT CM Line Cards have counters for just CRC errors and collisions Va C C Received Packets Transmitted Packets Show Port Statistics UN Module 14 Port B RC Errors ollisions oOoooo Return to Port Statistics P Figure 66 Show Port Statistics Window The port statistics are described in Table 17 Table 17 Port Statistics Row Description Received The number of packets received by the port from the Packets network device connected to it This statistic is only available on the AT CM2KOS Line Card Transmitted The number of packets trans
136. cal Stable Yes Remote Discovering No Remote Stable Yes Critical Event No Dying Gasp No Link Fault No OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0001 Vendor Information ox00160001 Vendor OUI 00 30 84 Mode Active Max OAMPUD Size 64 Loopback Support Yes Even Support Yes Veriable Support Yes Unidirect Support Yes Figure 99 Remote OAM Information Tab This tab is for viewing purposes only Refer to Table 26 on page 215 for item definitions 222 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Displaying OAM Statistics Menus Note These procedures require that the local and remote AT CM Line Cards be set to the OAM visible mode To display OAM statistics for local OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 Select the AT CM Line Card whose OAM statistics you want to view The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu in Figure 54 on page 140 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu in Figure 89 on page 204 From the OAM Configuration Menu select Show OAM Statistics to display the Show OAM Statistics window in Figure 100 Ke Show OAM Statistics UN Module 11 Port A TX OAMPDUS 70917 Rx OAMPDUS 70918 Tx Information OAMPDUS 70917 Rx Information OAMPDU
137. cal event notification from the remote OAM client A critical event notification indicates a severe error condition that does not result in a complete reset or reboot by the remote client go Yes The local OAM client received a critical event notification from the remote OAM client o No The local OAM client has not received a critical event notification Dying Gasp Indicates whether or not the local OAM client received a dying gasp notification from the remote OAM client A dying gasp notification indicates that the remote chassis with the remote OAM client experienced a power failure 0 Yes The local OAM client received a dying gasp notification D No The local OAM client has not received a dying gasp notification For background information refer to Dying Gasp Feature on page 52 Link Fault Indicates whether or not the receiver connector on the fiber optic port on port A is receiving a signal ao Yes The receiver connector is receiving a signal D No received connector is not receiving a signal OAM Version Indicates the version supported by the media converter line card This field contains the value 0x01 to indicate compliance with Version 1 of this protocol AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 26 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Config Revision Indicates the current revision of the Information TLV
138. card Image Remote Linecard L Information Chassis Diagnostics Information Image Information Slot Number SFP Information 172 Figure 75 SFP Information Tab 4 Selectthe Slot Number field and enter the slot number of the line card with the SFP module You can specify only one slot number 5 Click Apply Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management This chapter has the following sections o Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Menus on page 174 D Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Web Browser Windows on page 182 D Displaying the Version Numbers of Remote AT CM Line Cards on page 187 For background information refer to Remote Peer Management on page 46 For instructions on how to configure the AT CM Line Cards for this feature refer to Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 74 173 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Menus To configure remote AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Remote Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu shown in Figure 76 The menu shows the status of the remote peer connections between the fiber optic ports on the local AT CM Line Cards in the managed chassis and their remote line card coun
139. case and the numbers 1 to 9 Do not use special characters such as spaces asterisks or exclamation points To delete the current password without assigning a new password enter a space in the password field The default password for the manager account is friend and the default password for the operator account is operator For information on the other options in the Omega Options Menu refer to Configuring Management Security on page 90 6 Return to the Main Menu 69 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session Assigning an IP Address Configuration and Changing the 70 Community Strings The management card has to be assigned an IP address configuration to perform these management functions Remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server 2 uuuuiu Pinging a remote device The IP address configuration has to consist of a unique IP address and a subnet mask The configuration must also include a default gateway address if the management card and the network devices e g syslog server or TFTP server are located on different networks This address is the IP address of the router interface that represents the first hop to reaching the remote networks where the devices reside Since a management card
140. ceiver Sensitivity Long Haul Line Build Out DSX 1 0 to 133ft OdB CSU Test or Normal Transmission Normal PRBS Disabled Remote Loopback Disabled 289 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Software Programs 290 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples This appendix provides two examples of SNMPv3 configurations using the SNMPv3 Table menus In addition a worksheet is provided which you can use as an aid when configuring the SNMPv3 protocol This appendix includes the following sections D SNMPv3 Manager Configuration on page 291 O SNMPv3 Operator Configuration on page 293 O SNMPv3 Worksheet on page 294 SNMPv3 Configuration Examples SNMPv3 Manager Configuration This appendix provides SNMPv3 configuration examples for the following types of users O Manager O Operator In addition an SNMPv3 Configuration Table is provided to record your SNMPv3 configuration For more information about the SNMPv3 protocol see Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 on page 237 This section provides a sample configuration for a Manager with a User Name of systemadmin24 Each table is listed with its parameters Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu User Name manager Authentication Protocol MD5 Privacy Protocol DES Storage Type NonVvolatile 291 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples 292 Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name internet View Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 Su
141. chassis is powered on 1 The AT CM Line Card initializes its AT S73 Management Software a process that takes approximately one minute to complete During this process the line card uses the default values for its parameter settings to forward network traffic through its ports AT CM Line Cards and Remote Peer Management AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 2 After the line card initializes its software it queries for a management card over the backplane of the chassis 3 If the chassis does not have a management card the line card configures its operating parameters using the settings in its configuration file in flash memory 4 Ifthe chassis has a management card the following occurs a The management card examines its master configuration file for the auto copy setting for the line card s slot b If auto copy for the slot is enabled the management card copies the settings of the line card for that slot from its master configuration file and sends them to the line card over the backplane When the line card receives the settings it examines them to determine whether or not they are from the same line card model If they are itimplements the settings If they are not it uses the settings in its own configuration file in flash memory to configure its parameters c If auto copy for the slot is disabled the line card uses the settings in its own configuration file in flash memory to configure its opera
142. contact IP addresses of SNMP trap receivers SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c community strings SNMPv3 configurations Management security i e passwords console timer etc Network Time Protocol client Syslog client 10 100Base TX port Temperature threshold Console port s baud rate Note Before performing these procedures save the current configurations of the AT CM Line Cards in the master configuration file For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 Note A management card resets when its parameter settings are returned to the default values It will not respond to management commands for one minute while it initializes its management software To resume managing the device start a local management session on the unit Restoring the default settings on the management card does not interrupt the network operations of the line cards in the chassis To restore the default settings on the management card from the menus 1 2 If the chassis has two management cards remove the standby card From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration menu is shown in Figure 20 on page 80 Select Return System Configuration to Default A confirmation prompt is displayed 113 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 114 Web Browser 4 Enter Y for Yes to restore the parameters on the management card to their default values or N for No to cancel the procedure If you
143. cription Authentication Protocol continued N None This value represents no authentication protocol When messages are received users are not authenticated This selection does not support a Privacy Protocol Note You may want to assign NONE to a super user Authentication Password An authentication password of 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Applies only to MD5 and SHA authentication protocols Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Applies only to MD5 and SHA authentication protocols The possible values are D DES This value makes the DES privacy or encryption protocol the privacy protocol for this User Table entry With this selection messages transmitted between the host and the device are encrypted with the DES protocol N None Select this value if you do not want a privacy protocol for this User Table entry With this selection messages transmitted between the host and the switch are not encrypted A privacy password of 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters Applies only to DES privacy protocol Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you di
144. d If you install a second management card into a lower numbered slot than the existing card while the chassis is powered off the master configuration file of the new card which will become the active card will overwrite the configuration file on the existing card when you power on the chassis If the auto copy settings in the new master configuration file is enabled for the chassis slots the configuration settings of the line cards may change For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 You can monitor the communications between the active and standby management cards over the chassis backplane by connecting a personal computer with a terminal emulator program to the Console port on the standby card There are Update Copy and Heartbeat messages Update and Copy messages are sent by the active management card when updating the master configuration file on the standby card Heartbeat messages are generated periodically by the standby card to check the status of the active card 27 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Access to Your Network 28 The management card must be able to access your network if it will be performing any of these functions o2 uuuuiu Supporting remote Telnet web browser or SNMP management Sending event messages to a syslog server Setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol server Sending SNMP traps to trap receivers Uploading or downloading files to a TFTP s
145. d select the Last Saved Configuration tab shown in Figure 65 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Port amp Port B Setting Line Card Configuration Default Configuration Current Last Saved Configuration Configuration Auto copy Slot Number 6 Card Type CM202 Operation Mode OAM Visible Last Saved Configuration Port A 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Auto negotiate Duplex MDI MDIX lt Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 65 Last Saved Configuration Tab 158 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide This tab displays the last saved configuration settings for this card The settings are obtained from the master configuration file on the management card If the card is new to the slot the settings are from the previous card installed in the slot If the fields are empty the master configuration file does not have a previous configuration for this slot or the previous and current line cards of the slot are different models 5 Torestore the line card to the last saved configuration click the Restore to Last Saved Configuration
146. d Configurations Save System and All Line Card Configurations Return System Configuration to Default Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Return to Main Menu E Figure 13 Save Commands in the Configuration Menu AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The same commands in the web browser windows are found in the Files tab of the Configuration window shown Figure 14 Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c SNMPv3 Files Configuration Save System Configuration Q Save All Cards Configurations Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations Return Configuration in Management Card to Default Apply Configuration File Upload Figure 14 Save Commands in the Files Tab There are also save commands in the Line Card Configuration menus of the individual local and remote line cards These menus are part of a series of menus that are used to configure the parameters on the line cards The example in Figure 16 is from a local line card T Line Card Configuration Auto copy Line Card Configuration Display Current Configuration Display Last saved Configuration Display Default Configuration Restore Last Saved Configuration Return Line Card to Default Configuration Save Line Card Configuration REI to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 15 Save Command in the Line Card Configuration Menu for a Local AT CM Line Card 65 C
147. d has completed the reset process when its status changes to On in the Menu View 163 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software 164 Menus The procedures in this section are for displaying the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software and the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards and the AT CV5M02 Management Card respectively This information might be useful if you obtain new versions of the programs and want to ascertain which line cards need the new releases Also you might be asked to provide this information if you contact Allied Telesis technical support for assistance Note The AT CV Media Converter Line Cards do not use management software To view the information from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration The Administration Menu is shown in Figure 28 on page 98 2 From the Administration Menu select Diagnostics to display the Diagnostic Menu shown in Figure 45 on page 121 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 3 From the Diagnostics Menu select Line Card Image Version An example of the Line Card Module Software Image Version window is shown in Figure 69 This window is for viewing purposes only 20 Line Card Module Software Image Version UN Converteon Module App Ver BootLdr ver 1 AT CV5M02 v3 0 0 2 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 AT CM202 v2
148. dby state of a management card is unrelated to OAM on the line cards The possible values are o A The management card is in the active state Oo S The management card is in the standby state IPC This column displays utilization information of the backplane by the management card and the AT CM Line Cards and is intended for manufacturing and test purposes For the AT CV5M02 Management Card this column displays the following information 1804 i C A This is the slot number of the AT CM Line Card the management card is currently polling For example the value 12 indicates that the management card is polling the AT CM Line Card in slot 12 The management card does not poll slots containing AT CV Line Cards B This is the total number of messages the management card is waiting to transmit over the backplane to the AT CM Line Cards C This is the total number of responses the management card is waiting to receive from the AT CM Line Cards 175 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Table 20 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description IPC Continued For AT CM Line Cards this column displays the following information 000 J C en A This toggles to when the management card is sending a message to the line card in the slot om B This toggles to when the management card has a message to transmit
149. de SML Smart MissingLink mode OAM Visib OAM Visible mode OAM Bypas OAM Bypass mode LCMgmt The operating mode is controlled by the card s DIP switches u uuu iu D Resetting The line card is initializing its management software This state only applies to AT CM Line Cards For the AT CV5M02 Management Card this column displays the card s state The possible states are o Active The management card is in the active state D Standby The management card is in the standby mode This state only applies to redundant AT CV5M02 Management Cards For background information refer to Redundant Management Cards on page 26 IPC This column displays utilization information of the backplane by the management card and the AT CM Line Cards This information is intended for manufacturing and test purposes For the AT CV5M02 Management Card this column displays the following information 1804 i A This is the slot number of the line card the management card is currently polling For example the value 12 indicates that the management card is polling the AT CM Line Card in slot 12 Slots that have AT CV Line Cards are not polled by the management card B This is the total number of messages the management card is waiting to transmit over the backplane to the AT CM Line Cards 129 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 13 Module Status and Configuration Menu
150. ds start a new management session Note For explanations of the two other selections in the Management Card Redundancy tab refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Setting the Baud Rate of the Console Port Menus The RS 232 Console port on the front faceplate of the management card is used to locally manage the card This type of management session is accomplished with a terminal or a computer with a terminal emulator program The following procedures are used to set the baud rate of the Console port The baud rate is the only adjustable parameter on the port Refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 for all of the Console port settings Note Changing the baud rate of the Console port during a local management session ends your management session To resume managing the chassis change the baud rate of your terminal or terminal emulator program To set the baud rate of the Console port from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 From the System Configuration Menu select Terminal Configuration The Terminal Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 43 Terminal Configuration Menu Data Rate baud rate Return to System Configura
151. ds use the same bootloader Be sure to include the bin extension Not all new releases of the AT S73 Management Software for the AT CM Line Cards include a new bootloader file Refer to the software release notes for information After entering the appropriate information in the fields click Update To save this information in the master configuration file select the Files tab choose Save System Configuration and All Card Configurations and click Apply To perform the actual upgrade go to Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP on page 275 274 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP The procedure in this section explains how to use TFTP to download new versions of the management software programs to the AT CV5M02 Management Card or the AT CM Line Cards The procedure has the following requirements m m There has to be a node with TFTP server software on your network The management card must have an IP address configuration For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 80 The management card should reside on the same subnet as the TFTP server or should have access to its subnet through routers or other Layer 3 routing devices If the management card resides on a different subnet from the TFTP server the card s IP address configuration has to include the default gateway address that identifies the IP
152. e NonVvolatile Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name internet View Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 or internet Subtree Mask View Type Included 293 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples 294 SNMPv3 Worksheet Storage Type Nonvolatile Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Group Name Operators Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level Authentication Read View Name internet Write View Name Notify View Name This section provides a table that you can use as a worksheet when configuring SNMPv3 Each SNMPv3 Table is listed with its associated parameters SNMPv3 Parameters SNMPv3 User Table User Security Name Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Storage Type SNMPv3 View Table Menu View Name View Subtree OID format Text Name Subtree Mask Hex format View Type Storage Type SNMPv3 Access Table Menu Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide SNMPv3 Parameters Continued Write View Name Notify View Name Storage Type SNMPv3 Group Table Menu Security Name Security Model Group Name Storage Type SNMPv3 Notify Table Menu Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu Target Add
153. e ambient air temperature To set the temperature threshold from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 Select Temperature Threshold Configuration to display the Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu in Figure 39 The temperature threshold is given in Celsius C Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu Converteon Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 Return to System Configuration Menu Figure 39 Temperature Threshold Configuration Menu 4 Select Maximum Temperature Threshold and enter a new value The range is 0 to 75 C The default is 60 C 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To set the temperature threshold from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 3 Click Edit in the Temperature Threshold section 115 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 116 4 In the Temperature Threshold pop up window click the Maximum Temperature Threshold field and enter a new value The range is 0 to 75 C The default is 60 C Click Update To save your changes in t
154. e 10 Main Menu Note The Management Card Redundancy option is only supported on the AT CV5M02 Management Card in the AT CV5000 Chassis This feature is not supported on the AT CV1200 or AT CV1203 Chassis Note Always remember to select Quit from the Main Menu when you finish managing a chassis If you close your terminal emulator program without logging out the management session remains active and all further management is blocked until the console timer times out 59 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session The instructions in Table 6 explain how to move through the menus and select menu options Table 6 Menu Selection Options When directed to You must Select an option Highlight the option by pressing the Up 7 or Down 4 arrow key and then pressing Return or Type the first character of the option at the prompt and press Return If two or more options have matching initial characters type the initial characters until the option you want is highlighted and press Return Enter information for Type the information and press Return example the IP address of a management card Return to the previous Press Esc or select the Return to option screen at the bottom of the menu Activated options are preceded with the symbol in a menu In the following example the first option is activated Enable this port Disable this port When you select a field
155. e Cards If you have a large number of AT CM Line Cards to configure you can speed up the process with the auto copy feature To use the feature you configure one line card with the necessary settings and then activate the auto copy feature on the slot Line cards subsequently installed in the same slot will be assigned the same settings automatically For the auto copy feature to work the line cards have to be of the same model For instance if you were to install the AT CM202 Line Card in a slot that had been configured for the AT CM212A 1 Line Card the new card would reject the configuration from the management card and would instead use the parameter settings in its own configuration file For background information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 To configure multiple AT CM Line Cards with the same settings perform the previous procedure up to step 16 and then perform these additional steps After configuring the parameter settings for the OAM client on the line card return to the card s Module Configuration Menu Select Line Card Configuration From the Line Card Configuration menu select Auto copy Line Card Configuration From the Display Current Configuration menu select Auto copy Enable Although the setting of the auto copy feature is set in a card s Module Configuration Menu it applies to the slot The setting is not transferred when a line card is installed in a different slot or chassis T
156. e Cards AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Versions of the AT CM Line Cards that Support Dying Gasp sssenen emen 54 Versions of the Management Software that Support Dying Gasp sseeeem emen 54 OAM Parameter Settings for the OAM based Features sssssssseeeeeneee emnes 56 Menu Selection Options ntt e oi ce ei e iere eee bie deca at dote de aa a esee ride eph aiuto e qne quus 60 Omega Options Rm 91 Event Log Format eder testes anc E ERE execs end daca RR Ir e RU Re ESPERA ERE waeneate 99 Event Log Messa gOS 2 dae 100 Module Configuration Menu for a Management Card sssssssseseeeee ener 108 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Cards eese 109 Chassis Diagnostics Menu RM 122 Module Status and Configuration Menu o oo eecceceeeeeecereeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeeseeaeeseneeeenaeeeeenaeesseeeeeenaeeeneaes 128 Module Status and Configuration Window sssssseeseeeeeenn nennen enne trennen ener nnn nenne 134 Module Configuration Menu tanna itte teur eco etre Pee padece eene aec it near eere iea 139 Port Configuration Menu for Both Fiber Optic Ports and Twisted Pair Ports sseeeene 141 Port Statistics e I EEEEE 160 Line Card Module Software Image Version WindOw esee eem nennen
157. e Download Menu P Figure 128 Image Download via TFTP Menu 3 Select one of the following menu options Management Card Image Download Select this option to download a new version of the AT S99 Management Software to the AT CV5M02 Management Card Single Local Line Card Image Select this option to download a new version of the AT S73 Management Software to a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis When you select this option a prompt is displayed for the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can enter only one slot number Single Local Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader file on a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis When prompted enter the slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Remote Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the AT S73 Management Software on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature When prompted enter the slot number of the local line card counterpart of the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Remote Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature When prompted enter the slot number of the local line card counterpart of the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number 4 Aft
158. e SNMPv3 protocol The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure the group to authenticate SNMPv3 entities users and to encrypt messages Security Level A AuthNoPriv P AuthPriv N NoauthNoPriv The possible values are Note This value must match the security level of the corresponding user name in the SNMPv3 User Table A AuthNoPriv This option provides authentication but no privacy protocol The SNMP user is authenticated but without encryption You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol P AuthPriv This option provides authentication and the privacy protocol This security level encrypts messages using a privacy protocol and authenticate SNMP entities This level provides the greatest level of security You can select this value if you configured the Security Model parameter with the SNMPv3 protocol N NoauthNoPriv This option provides no authentication and no privacy protocol This security level is appropriate if you do not want authentication of SNMP entities or encryption This security level provides the least security Note The only security level for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c is N NoauthNoPriv 269 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 34 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters Parameter Description Storage Type V Volatile N The possible values are NonVolatile Row Status V Volatile This selection b
159. e Se ay Context Security Security Context n 3 K Storage N w Group Name Prefix Model Level Match Read View rite View Notify View Type grpmanager usm AuthNoPriv Prefix viewUSMmanager viewUSMmanager viewUSMmanager Permanent g ig grpcommpublic any NoAuthNoPriv Prefix viewCommpublic none none Permanent g ig grpcommprivate any NoAuthNoPriv Prefix viewCommprivate viewCommprivate viewCommprivate Permanent g ig Figure 116 SNMPv3 Access Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Access Table entries are defined in Table 30 Table 30 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters Parameter Description Group Name A descriptive name for the group of up to 32 alphanumeric characters You are not required to enter a unique value here because the SNMPv3 Access Table entry is indexed with the Group Name Security Model and Security Level parameter values However unique group names allow you to more easily distinguish the difference groups There are four default values for this field defaultV 1GroupReadOnly defaultV1GroupReadWrite defaultV2cGroupReadOnly defaultV2cGroupReadWrite u uuu These values are reserved for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c implementations 255 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 30 SNMPv3 Access Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Model The possible values are Select one of the following SNMP protocols as the Security Model for this Group Name 1 v1 Select this v
160. e a TFTP server or a syslog server on a different subnet The address has to be a member of the same subnet as the card s IP address and should specify the first hop to reaching the remote subnet 5 To activate the DHCP client to assign the IP address from a DHCP server on the network select Enable DHCP If you want to learn the MAC address of the management card to enter on the DHCP or BOOTP server refer to Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 121 To communicate with your network the management card adopts the MAC address of the backplane of the chassis as its MAC address Review the following guidelines before activating the DHCP client O The 10 100Base TX port on the management card has to be connected to a device on your network such as a Fast Ethernet switch because card communicates with your network through that port o If the card already has a static IP address the address is overwritten by the address from the DHCP server O The management card transmits two queries to the DHCP server when the client is activated If there is no response from the server the management card operates without an IP address Tochange the community strings enter the new values in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields Community strings are case sensitive and can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted 7 Return to the Main Menu
161. e downloads of new management software Dying gasp feature OAM loopback test OAM variable requests u uuu iu If so perform this procedure to configure the cards It explains how to set the operating modes of the cards to the OAM visible mode and how to verify their OAM settings This procedure has to be performed at a Converteon chassis that has a management card Thus those AT CM Line Cards to be deployed at remote sites have to be initially installed and configured in a chassis with a management card Note If you plan to use the dying gasp feature perform Configuring the AT CM Line Cards on page 230 instead of this procedure Although the OAM based features share many of the same settings the dying gasp feature has more stringent hardware and software requirements as explained in that procedure You can use either the menus or the web browser windows to configure the line cards This procedure uses the menus To configure an AT CM Line Card for the OAM based features 1 Install the AT CM Line Card in a Converteon chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card and start a local management session or a remote Telnet management session on the chassis 2 Wait one minute for the AT CM Line Card to initialize its AT S73 Management Software 3 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 4 In the Module Status and Configuration Menu examine the o
162. e eec b cea Desde aiai 72 Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features sse 74 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card sse emere nnns 79 Assigning an IP Address Configuration ccccccccccecceceeeecee cece eeeeeaee cess ceeaaeeeeeeseaaeceeeesecaeaeeeesecaeaeesesesaeaeeeeseseeaeeeeeeseaeeeeees 80 MIND 80 lu hrged d e 82 Assigning a NaMe dete ER o esie eiecti dese bec ee deseo deii eds qe rue o io gene 85 MID c ee ee a a ee 85 Web BrOWSET e naie 85 Assigning Contact and Location Information ssssssseeseeeneneeneeen nennen nennen enne enne enne EEEa nennen 86 METUS 5 restet e Up o e ii et tomate n n mamisieth his 86 Web BrowSer LEES 86 Configuring the SNMP Community Strings eeesssssesseeeeeeeeene enne ennemi nenne erret KEENE nennen en nnne 88 MIND V 88 Web BrowSer 2 222002 ne eR eine ipe etim ve D edse une eis 88 Specifying the IP Addresses of SNMP Trap Receivers ssssssssseeeenee eene eene nnne n erret nnne n nene eere nene 89 MID MMC P 89 Web BrIOWSeF 2 eerta e pee chess E i Gaetan I edge e e aan
163. e fiber optic cable that links the line cards AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide AT CM Line Card in remote AT CV1000 Chassis Management traffic 1 9 AT CV5000 Chassis and AT CV5MO2 Management Card E z AT CM Line Card in slot 11 Local or remote management workstation Figure 1 Remote Peer Management Example 1 This feature is supported on all of the Converteon chassis In the next example the chassis with the management card is the AT CV1203 Chassis 47 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 48 AT CM Line Card in remote AT CV1000 Chassis Management traffic gt AT CM Line Card and AT CV5M02 0 Management Card in Ty AT CV1203 Chassis Local or remote management workstation Figure 2 Remote Peer Management Example 2 You can manage the remote line cards from the menus or the web browser windows From the menus you use the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu Selected from the Main Menu this menu lists all of the media converter line cards in the managed chassis and identifies those remote line cards that have remote peer connections to their local counterparts An exampl
164. e management card The strings are used to manage the media converter with an SNMP application and for trap verification To protect the card from unauthorized access you should change the community strings even if you do not plan to employ an SNMP application Anyone who learns the device s IP address and community strings can alter its settings with an SNMP program without having to know the manager account password To change the SNMP community strings from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration This displays the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 Select IP Parameters to display the menu in Figure 22 on page 81 4 Enter the new community strings in the Get Community String Set Community String and Trap Community String fields A community string can have up to thirteen characters Spaces and special characters are permitted Community strings are case sensitive 5 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To change the SNMP community strings from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Select the SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab The SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c tab is shown in Figure 24 on page 87 3 To change the community strings click Edit to display a pop up window
165. e of the menu is shown in Figure 3 The columns under LOCAL MODULE lists the line cards in the local chassis The columns under REMOTE MODULES lists those remote AT CM Line Cards that have remote peer connections to their local counterparts To manage a remote AT CM Line Card you select it from the menu This redirects the session to the remote line card For more information on this menu refer to Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Menus on page 174 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Local line cards in the managed chassis Remote line cards T Remote M gule Status and Configuration Converteon LOCAL MODULE REMOTE MODULE FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Mod_Name CardTypever ST OV IPC VER Mod Name CardTypeVer VER OV SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN 1 AT CV5M02 A 502 v300 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 Regll r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 g 00v O 0 Y 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 Reg20 r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y 0 0 Y 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 Reg21_r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 00v O 0 Y 5 Area2a AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 Area2a AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y O0 0 Y 6 Area2b AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 area2b AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 00v O 0 Y 7 Regl2 AT CM202 v2 Y 00 v300 Regl2 r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y 0 0 Y 8 AT CV102
166. e possible states are o The twisted pair port has establish a link to a network device o o The twisted pair port has not establish a link to a network device This column is omitted for the fiber optic port because remote peer management will not work without a connection between the fiber optic ports of the local and remote line cards SP This column displays the speeds of the remote ports The possible speeds are o 10 10 Mbps 3 100 100 Mbps o 1G 1 Gbps FC This column displays the status of flow control on the ports of the remote AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Flow control is enabled on the port o N Flow control is disabled on the port IngRL This column displays the settings of the ingress rate limiting filters on the ports on the remote AT CM Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting EgrRL This column displays the settings of the egress rate limiting filters on the ports on the AT CM Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting OAM This column displays the status of the OAM clients on the remote AT CM Line Cards The following OAM client information is displayed 00 C 177 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management Table 20 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description OAM Continued A This d
167. e they receive and initialize the new software This procedure has to be performed from the menus To upgrade the management software from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Image Download to display the menu in Figure 126 Image Download Menu Image Download via TFTP Image Download via XMODEM Return to Main Menu Figure 126 Image Download Menu 2 Select Image Download via TFTP This displays the menu in Figure 127 E Image Download via TFTP ON Management Card Image Download Single Local Line Card Image Single Local Line Card Bootloader Multiple Line Cards Image by Card Type All Line Cards Image Single Remote Line Card Image Single Remote Line Card Bootloader Rerum to Image Download Menu E Figure 127 Image Download via TFTP Menu 3 Select one of the following menu options Management Card Image Download Select this option to upgrade the AT 899 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Single Local Line Card Image Select this option to upgrade the AT S73 Management Software on a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis After you select this option a prompt is displayed for the 276 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide slot number of the line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number Single Local Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader file on a single local AT CM Line Card in the chassis
168. ed To resume managing the chassis press any key The status messages are somewhat different if you install a second management card while viewing the Module Configuration and Status menu or the Remote Module Configuration and Status menu but their meanings are the same 33 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Converteon Chassis 34 Table 1 lists the four chassis in the Converteon product line Table 1 Converteon Chassis Supports Supports Number of PP Redundant Chassis Redundant Slots Power Suppi Management PP y Card AT CV1000 1 No No AT CV1200 2 Yes No AT CV1203 2 Yes No AT CV5000 18 Yes Yes The AT CV1200 Chassis and AT CV1203 Chassis are physically identical The only difference between them is that the AT CV1203 Chassis supports the OAM based dying gasp feature which is explained in Dying Gasp Feature on page 52 The AT CM and the AT CV Media Converter Line Cards can be installed in any of the chassis The only exception is the double slot AT CM70S Line Card which is not supported in the AT CV1000 Chassis Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards The sections in this chapter are AT CM Media Converter Line Cards on page 36 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards on page 40 Operating Modes on page 42 u uuu OAM based Features on page 46 35 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CM Media Converter Line Card
169. ee posa SE Asean ean eee ead etre enda 23 Event E Og c tei eH RIMQIeIHEOOe ud eres enini inii 23 freno testes 23 SYSIOG Cliente MR 23 Network Time Protocol Clierit Sees citet ed egets eicere cu socdeleuhdenesdcheedousveh seuss oid eed eed ede tee codes 24 Manager and Operator Accounts 2 E p dee uere uade eod dh deo Re neue dete Deseo da dae ee paene ue pe doe es 24 M nagement ACCESS d 25 Local M nagement RC E 25 Remote Telnet Managemieht 3 iN eue sete Bede aeidox t eet a eese DER tne eaae Doe tale Goatees celos bendtiune 25 Remote Web Browser Management eene eese teresa teneo dota a eee esee aite rede dee dte need aa ee ien 25 i Sans RET eig 25 Redundant Management Cards 5 eee deste eee ete eoa e ute uo mee sepe de tete oed cu bd e ud cte d eee deed qu esd pes 26 StAtUs Messages oix eor ete PEDEM nec 27 AAGGESS to foU ah ios c c 28 Configuration Files 2 32 2 ner pt nte ob ER PE devadubane O ND ERE Gs RR RC RR E Dr ETTE 29 AT GM BN IXe orm ERU 29 AT GV LllIne Gards reete atom EU eC n Rice iti misto 29 AT CV5M02 Management Card eiie torte ntn iain ib trai ines Dno rbd ken bee bague ctp riedia rex scedheserseeadhensses 29 Restoring Configurations to AT CM Line Cards ssesseseenennen nenn
170. efault Settings To view the current settings of a remote card 1 2 Select Line Card Configuration From the Line Card Configuration menu select Display Current Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 51 on page 136 The port parameters are described in Table 16 on page 141 and the OAM parameters in Table 25 on page 205 To configure the parameter settings of a port on a remote AT CM Line Card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select the port you want to configure You can configure only one port at a time Configure the parameters as necessary Refer to Table 16 on page 141 for parameter descriptions To restore the default settings on a remote AT CM Line Card Caution This procedure may disrupt network operations Some network traffic may be lost Note A remote line card that is returned to its default values continues to support remote peer management because the default operating mode for the AT CM Line Cards is OAM visible From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select Line Card Configuration To view the default settings prior to activating them on the line card select Display Default Configuration An example of the Display Default Configuration window is shown in Figure 63 on page 154 To return the parameter settings on the line card to the default values return to the Line Card Configuration Menu and select Return Line Card to Default Configuration
171. efines the IP address In the same way the OID table entry defines a MIB View and the subtree mask further restricts a user s view to a specific the column and row of the MIB View The value of the Subnet Mask parameter is dependent on the subtree you select For example if you configure the View Subtree parameter as MIB ifEntry 0 3 has the following value 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 0 3 To restrict the user s view to the third row all columns of the ifEntry MIB enter the following value for the Subtree Mask parameter ff bf View Type The possible values are I Included Enter this value to permit the View Name to see the subtree specified above E Excluded Enter this value to not permit the View Name to see the subtree specified above Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 View Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 253 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 Access Table entries The SNMPv3 Access Table is used to configure security
172. ement Menu N Module 4 Port A Port Configurations OAM Configurations ites to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 54 Port Management Menu Note The OAM Configurations selection only applies to Port A on AT CM Line Cards set to the OAM visible mode or the OAM bypass mode Otherwise the selection is hidden from view The AT CV Line Cards do not support OAM AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 4 Select Port Configurations The Port Configuration Menu for the selected port is displayed The options in the menu will vary depending on the type of port and card The example in Figure 55 is for a twisted pair port Va gt MDI gt Port Enable Port Disable gt Flow Control Enable Flow Control Disable gt Auto negotiate Manual negotiate MDIX Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit Port Statistics Port Configuration Menu E Converteon Module 4 Port A M CREER to Module Management Menu ul Figure 55 Port Configuration Menu 5 Configure the settings of the port as needed Table 16 explains all of the possible parameters for both twisted pair and fiber optic ports Table 16 Port Configuration Menu for Both Fiber Optic Ports and Twisted Pair Ports Setting Description Port Enable Port Disable These two selections enable and disable a port When a port is enabled it forwards traffic to and from the network device connected to it This
173. emote Ports iet eee rH ERO Renee EG DE DIR rere iaaa 180 Restoring the Default Settings irii eene Denia A SEE RR IR ER a Area UR dae SP eene eo HER doce aire ed aai 180 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration emen nene nennen nnne nenne 181 Saving the Parameter Settings ree re teet eee Deed dit caretes d ced ode d ensue gebe cedi e ed eee need aded cede 181 Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Web Browser Windows esseee em emen 182 Displaying the Current Configuration crecen eere aorta it ep ordena de iibro nte eade a depu da aiiai iana 184 Configuring Remote Ports wisis moriti eai eeepc eee Lauer eser eene de oed eere dee op ede Pedes 184 Restoring the Default Parameter Settings cc ccccesseeesencesseceeecseneneserenseseenesenteseoueeessaceesusensedediassotessideseese centers 185 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration sessseeeeeeeeeennee nnne nne nennen nennen nnne 185 Saving the Parameter Settirigs iiti rcge n tee no ttr de LE good okaiis LX de cR Te sex eov tei deos 186 Displaying the Version Numbers of Remote AT CM Line Cards sssseee eee nennen enne 187 METUS ite vim eene cU tn nii 187 Web Browse M EEEN ANEY 188 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card nacen 191 Selecting the Management Method for the T1 E1 Ports nennen nme enne eren 1
174. en nnne nennen enn enenr nennen 30 AT CM Line Cards and Remote Peer Management sse enne neran nen nennen 31 Redundant Management Catds rie e e e Hb Mae tn i ee Ee ee eee 32 CONVEMEOM CHASSIS vs ase 34 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 0 cccccccccccseceeeeeeecaeceeeesecaeceeeeeeceaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeseneaeess 35 AT CM Media Converter Line Cards ennan ceni naan a E aE KAA An ENEE Ea AKE CA NEERA Ea aa ina aaa deai 36 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards sssssssssseseeeeeen enn enne nnne enne een retentis eter rin nennen nnne nennen nennen 40 Operating Modes 2 Lectio ett HE eed essei iate ia oU cS eique soa desque 42 Link Test Mode eee tet ee ppc b e ey oe Ee te UR eet 42 Missing STIL oro c 43 Smart MissingLink Mode 5 1 erre nier recede dicen ded dde codec de eod edo te eoe dade ee a dee edad oda dede adadi des 44 OAM RUN lev 45 OAM Bypass Mode e e e eer ipn epe ie e eoe e Ege ed ee Fed een Toe Ec a 45 Setting the Operating Mode eerte treten terere Ra riter Ren PR HER ERR Hate a tres iena opa ida t ede ekne 45 Contents OAM based g pP cem 46 Remote Peer Management cccccececeeceeeeeecaeceeeeeeeaeceeeecenaeaee a aa eE aaa a hires aria are aaae tense tenens sedet ntes nennt a 46 Remote Updates of the AT S73 Management Software sssssssssssseeeee ee
175. en two line cards one local to the AT CV5000 Chassis and the other remote the dying gasp feature should be working too For information on this window refer to Configuring Remote AT CM Line Cards from the Menus on page 174 Note The AT CM Line Cards have to be in the OAM operational state to send or receive the dying gasp signal The cards may take up to two minutes to achieve this state when a chassis is powered on or the cards are reset They have to Initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM state Power off the AT CV1203 Chassis If the chassis has two power supplies disconnect one of the supplies wait a second or two and power off the second supply From the Main Menu select Administration From the Administration Menu select Event Log and Display Event Log If the AT CV1203 Chassis has just one power supply or if it has two power supplies but not a management card you should see this message in the event log Dying Gasp has occurred on remote linecard number Number is the slot number of the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis that received the dying gasp signal from the remote line card in the AT CV1203 Chassis 235 Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp If the remote AT CV1203 Chassis has two power supplies and the AT CV5M02 Management Card the event log should also contain this message logged when the first power supply on the remote chassis lost power CV1203 RPS Fa
176. ent Card Redundancy Tab ssssssssssseeeeeeen nennen enne nennen en ern enne enr nen tenere en 67 Module Status and Configuration Menu sssssssssssesssssenenen enn nrener ener nnn enn tnn niin nr nnns sensn nn nnns 75 Configuration MenU retorno e c tup ne io eR cose a aes caer d ee Ree ied fontes 80 System Configuration Menu a a a a rr a a r r a a e aa e e aa a aaea eit 80 IP Parameters MONU ET e aa Ghd nse ilo dance Ea a a a ae a EA aa Aan 81 oystemi TAB EE aat t PR TERR EHE E A O die xd 83 SNMPv1 amp SNMPV26 Tab oett petere Pee RE eee tee eed pee e oco ea tee me e tete toe ege Poe d seed pecu eg 87 Omega Options MenU 1 eren peer eerie dee tate E aet ee ded dee dea eu qe Ee Eee dde Deae e a ded dune pee eee E 90 iuAeeduame 93 General E 97 Administration Men 3 pete Le eie eio a e e aedi pi i UR cep d UE Reed Rte edge dui aa 98 EventLog Menu nete eed ee t oce ee He e 98 Event ore PECES 99 Event Log Taban nuran 103 AACUVILy MORIEOL 2525646 ze ET EE A E E EE EE EET 104 Sr I E E E T 105 Module Configuration Menu Management Card enne nennen nnn 107 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card sees 108 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card eese 109 Port A Tab for the M
177. ent session To end a management session select Quit from the Main Menu You should always exit from a management session when you finish managing a chassis This is to prevent blocking future management sessions and to protect the management card and line cards from unauthorized changes Note If you close your Telnet client without logging out the management session remains active and all further management is blocked until the console timer times out 61 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session Starting a Web Browser Management Session Note The requirements for remote web browser management are listed in Access to Your Network on page 28 To start a remote web browser management session 1 Enter the IP address of the management card in the URL field of your web browser as shown in Figure 11 If the chassis has two management cards enter the IP address of the active card URL Field Z Home Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a a 3A g Q B aA Stop Search Favorites History Mail Print e Back EGIT Refresh Home Figure 11 URL Field in a Web Browser 2 When prompted enter the username and password of the manager or operator account on the management card For the manager account the username is manager and the default password is friend For the operator account the username is operator and the default pass
178. enter 0 0 0 0 u uuu The IP address configuration has to include a default gateway address if the management card will be communicating with network devices like a TFTP server or syslog server that are located on a different subnet This address should specify the first hop to reaching the remote subnet and has to be a member of the same subnet as the card s IP address O The default values are 10 0 0 1 for the IP address 255 255 255 0 for the subnet mask and 0 0 0 0 for the default gateway address 5 If you want the card to obtain its IP address from a DHCP server on the network select Enable DHCP to activate the DHCP client Or to deactivate the client to assign the IP address manually select Disable DHCP The default setting for the client is disabled 81 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 82 Here are the guidelines to the DHCP client O The 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card has to be connected to a network device such as a Fast Ethernet switch because the card transmits the DHCP requests from that port o If the card already has a static IP address the address is overwritten by the address from the DHCP server D The management card issues two requests to the DHCP server when the client is activated If there is no response from the server the management card operates without an IP address configuration CO If you want to learn the MAC address of the management card
179. entity default C No Local station rejects the configuration of the peer OAM entity Indicates whether or not the local OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information it received from the remote OAM client Yes Indicates that the local OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information from the remote OAM client o No Indicates that the local OAM client has not received any OAM information or is not satisfied with the OAM information from the remote OAM client Remote Discovering Indicates the remote station can accept or reject the configuration of the peer OAM entity D Yes Remote station accepts the configuration of the peer OAM entity a No Remote station rejects the configuration of the peer OAM entity 217 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 218 Table 26 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Remote Stable Indicates whether or not the remote OAM client is satisfied with the OAM information it received from the local OAM client Possible values are Oo Yes Indicates that the remote OAM client is satisfied with the information it received from the local OAM client o No Indicates that the remote OAM client has not received any OAM information or is not satisfied with the information from the local OAM client Critical Event Indicates whether or note the local OAM client received a criti
180. ents from the web browser Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card whose OAM information you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line 4 Chassis View Menu View Port Status Slot Number 11 ort Port OAM OAM Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Card If Port A is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A Click the OAM Local Information tab to display the window in Figure 97 Operation Mode Module Local OAM Information Line Card Operation Mode Operation Status MUX State Parser State Local Discovering Local Stable Remote Discovering Remote Stable Critical Event Dying Gasp Link Fault OAM Version Config Revision Vendor Information Vendor OUI Loopback State In Loopback Test Remote OAM Information Line Card Configuration OAM Statistics Module Status amp Configuration OAM Variable OAM Loopback Test Request AT CM202 OAM Visible Mode Operational Forward Forward No Yes No Yes No No No 0x01 0x0001 0x00160001 00 30 84 None No 220 Figure 97 OAM Local Information Tab This tab is for viewing purposes only The items are defined in Table 26 on page 215 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Displaying OAM Inform
181. er configuration file in this guide refer to the permanent file in flash memory on the management card As just explained the parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards are stored in two locations the configuration files on the individual line cards and the master configuration file on the management card The purpose of this redundancy is to make replacing line cards easier In the event a line card has to be replaced you can assign the new card the same configuration as its predecessor by restoring the previous configuration from the master configuration file on the management card This relieves you from having to manually configure new line cards A previous configuration of a line card can be restored either automatically or manually The former is referred to as auto copy This is set on a per slot basis A line card in a slot where auto copy is enabled always obtains its parameter settings from the master configuration file on the management card Thus a replacement card is automatically assigned the same settings as its predecessor You can also restore previous configurations manually Although a line card in a slot where auto copy is disabled uses the parameter settings in its individual configuration file you can manually command the management card to send the previous configuration to the line card Here is an overview of the configuration process of an AT CM Line Card when a card is installed in an active chassis or when a
182. er has to be set to Yes only on those remote line cards that will return test packets from remote sites For those line cards generating the test packets this parameter can be set to Yes or No Note The Link Event Support and the Variable Request Support parameters can be ignored For further information refer to Configuring an OAM Client on page 204 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 17 Return to the Main Menu 18 17 18 19 20 The line card is now configured for the OAM based features If you do not want to configure any other parameters on the card such as port speed or the card s name and if the card will be deployed at a remote site in an unmanaged chassis you can remove it from the chassis Entering a save command isn t necessary because your changes are saved automatically by the card in its configuration file If however the line card will remain in the chassis with the management card you should update the master configuration file on the management card This is accomplished by selecting Configuration from the Main Menu and Save System and All Line Card Configurations from the Configuration menu Once saved in the master configuration file the settings can be restored in the event the card is replaced For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 The line card is now configured for the OAM based features Repeat this procedure on the other AT CM Lin
183. er s Guide C All of your local and remote management sessions have to be conducted through the active management card o The RDY LED on the active card will be on The LED will be off on the standby card Oo The standby management card automatically transitions to the active state in about 20 seconds if the active card fails or is removed from the chassis or reset 0 The network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis are not affected when the management cards change states o The active and standby management cards use the same IP address configuration o To prohibit local or remote management through the standby card the Console port and the receiver on the 10 100Base TX port on the card are blocked However you can view status messages from the Console port of the standby management card O Even though the 10 100Base TX port is blocked on the standby card you should connect it to your network so that those management functions that rely on the card s access to network will be immediately available in the event the card becomes the active card O The two management cards maintain identical master configuration files For information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 Note When installing a second management card into an existing chassis you should install it while the chassis is powered on If the chassis is powered off you should install it in a higher numbered slot than the existing car
184. er selecting a download and responding to the prompts begin the file transfer with your terminal program Note To prevent damaging a management card or a line card do not power off the chassis or remove the card while the card is writing the file to flash memory 280 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Uploading the Master Configuration File from a Management Card Menus You can upload the master configuration file from a management card to a TFTP server on your network You might do this to maintain a history of the configurations of a chassis or to transfer the file to another management card Note The network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis are not affected by this procedure To upload the master configuration file to a TFTP server from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 20 on page 80 Note If you want to update the master configuration file before uploading it to the TFTP server select Save System and All Line Card Configurations from the Configuration Menu From the Configuration Menu select Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP to display the menu in Figure 129 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Upload Configuration File from Management Card Download Configuration File from Management Card Return to Configuration Figure 129 Configuration File Upload D
185. er single mode or multi mode fiber optic cable Most of these cards have fiber optic ports that have fixed operating distances However the AT CV1KSS Line Card has two slots for SFP modules for transferring traffic between a twisted pair port and a fiber optic port or two fiber optic ports depending on the modules All of the fiber optic ports on these line cards are standard Ethernet ports They can be connected to other Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet devices that have compatible fiber optic ports including other media converters The operating specifications of the fiber optic ports can be found in the Installation Guides that ship with the line cards Although these line cards do not have management software and are primarily intended as unmanaged devices you can use the AT CV5M02 Management Card to change their operating modes or to view card and port status Their port settings are not adjustable They have DIP switches for setting the cards operating modes and the MDI MDI X setting for the twisted pair ports This series supports the following operating modes For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 42 o Link Test D MissingLink D Smart MissingLink Note These line cards do not support the OAM based features Table 2 AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Type of Maximum Line Card Port Slot Connector Cable Speed Distance AT CV101 Fiber Optic Dual ST 50 12
186. erteon chassis is not part of the IEEE802 3ah end points In this mode the OAM function of the line card is disabled The module will pass all OAMPDUs whose vendor OUI is not Allied Telesis 215 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Table 26 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Line Card Operation Mode Continued OAM Visible Mode In this mode the line card generates and responds to OAMPDU packets As such it can initiate the OAM discovery process participate in OAM loopback tests and send OAM variable requests Operation Status Indicates the OAM operating status The possible values are o Disabled The OAM client is disabled o Passive Wait The OAM client is waiting for its remote OAM counterpart to initiate the OAM discovery process The client cannot initiate the OAM discovery process because its mode has been set to passive Active Send Local The OAM client has initiated the OAM discovery process and is waiting for a response from the remote OAM client to its queries The client is able to initiate the OAM discovery process because its mode has been set to active O Send Local and Remote The local OAM client is sharing its OAM settings with the remote client by sending OAM Information OAMPDUS that contain its settings and the OAM settings received from the remote client O IOAM Peering Locally Rejected
187. erver Pinging remote devices The requirements for these management functions are listed here o The management card must have an IP address configuration The configuration can be assigned manually or supplied by a BOOTP or DHCP server on your network For instructions refer to Assigning an IP Address Configuration on page 80 The card s 10 100Base TX port has to be connected to a device on your network such as an Ethernet switch The management card communicates with your network through that port The management card should reside on the same subnet as the remote devices i e Telnet client syslog server or SNMP trap receivers or have access to their subnet through routers or other Layer 3 routing devices If the management card and the remote devices reside on different subnets the card s IP address configuration should include a default gateway address that specifies the IP address of the router interface of the first hop to reaching the remote devices AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuration Files AT CM Line Cards AT CV Line Cards AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card and the media converter line cards store their parameter settings in a series of configuration files These files enable the cards to retain their settings even when they are removed from the chassis or when the chassis is powered off The parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards are stored in
188. f you choose to not assign a privacy value then SNMPv3 messages are sent in plain text format The SNMPv3 protocol allows you to configure MIB views for users and groups The MIB tree is defined by RFC 1155 Structure of Management Information as illustrated in Figure 108 on page 240 239 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 root ccitt 0 iso 1 joint iso ccitt 2 standard 0 registration authority 1 member body 2 identified organization 3 dod 6 l internet 1 a directory 1 mgmt 2 experimental 3 private 4 mib 2 1 system 1 at 3 icmp 5 udp 7 cmot 9 snmp 11 host 25 interfaces 2 ip 4 tcp 6 egp 8 transmission 10 dot1 dBridge 117 240 Figure 108 MIB Tree The management software supports the MIB tree starting with the Internet MIBs as defined by 1 3 6 1 There are two ways to specify a MIB view You can enter the OID number of the MIB view or its equivalent text name For example to specify MIBs in the Internet view you can enter the OID format 1 3 6 1 or the text name internet In addition you can define a MIB view that the user can access or a MIB view that the user cannot
189. followed by the port channel number separated by a space For example to change the remote loopback setting for port 2 you enter 52 Table 24 on page 198 lists the possible settings 6 When you finish managing the line card simply disconnect the management cable from the Console port The port doesn t have a logout command 201 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 202 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client The sections in this chapter are D Configuring an OAM Client on page 204 o Performing an OAM Loopback Test on page 209 D Displaying OAM Information for Local OAM Clients on page 214 o Displaying OAM Information for Remote OAM Clients on page 221 0 Displaying OAM Statistics on page 223 D Viewing MIB Variables with OAM Variable Requests on page 225 Note For background information refer to OAM based Features on page 46 203 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Configuring an OAM Client 204 Menus You should set the operating modes of the AT CM Line Cards to the OAM visible mode before configuring the OAM parameters For instructions refer to Setting the Operating Mode on page 145 To configure the OAM clients on the line cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module C
190. friend Operator Password operator Time Out Value 10 minutes Local Access Enabled 287 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Software Programs 288 Table 35 Default Settings for the AT S99 Management Software Settings Default Remote Access Telnet Enabled Console Port Data Rate 115200 Terminal mode VT 100 compatible ANSI Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow control None This table lists the factory default settings for the AT S73 Management Software on the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards Table 36 Default Settings for the AT S73 Management Software Settings Default Default Operating Mode OAM Visible Name None Port A Fiber Optic Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit Port B Twisted Pair Port State Enabled Flow Control Enabled Speed and Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation Ingress Rate Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit OAM Admin State Enabled Mode Passive AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 36 Default Settings for the AT S73 Management Software Settings Default Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 octets Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes T1 E1 Ports AT CM70S Line Card Carrier Type T1 Re
191. from the menu You can select only one operating mode The Line Card DIP Switch Mode selection activates the DIP switches on the line card so that the operating mode is controlled with the switches instead of the management software Note If you set the operating mode through the software the DIP switches on the card remain deactivated even if you move the card to a different slot or a different chassis To reactivate the switches install the card in a chassis that has the management card and select Line Card DIP Switch Mode from the Operating Mode Config Menu The following prompt is displayed Warning Changing the Operation Mode will reset the line card Change Operation Mode now Yes or No Type Y to continue or N to cancel the procedure This prompt is displayed If auto copy is enable operation mode change need to be saved to take affect Save line card configuration before rebooting Yes or NO Type Y for yes to update the master configuration file on the management card with the new setting for the card s operating mode This step is especially important if the auto copy feature is activated on the card s slot If the card s operating mode isn t saved in the master configuration file the new setting will not take affect because the card after resetting will simply revert to its previous operating mode If you are not sure whether or not the auto copy feature is enabled on the slot select Yes anyway
192. groups Each user must belong to a security group After you have configured a security group use the Group Table to assign users to security groups The parameters are Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Storage Type u uuuuiuiu Before adding entries to the Access Table you should configure entries in the View Table These values are used to configure the Read Write and Notify View parameters Refer to Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 251 To access the SNMPv3 Access Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Access Table The Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu is shown in Figure 115 a Configure SNMPv3 Access Table UN Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry CESAM to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 115 Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Menu 254 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To manage the SNMPv3 View Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Access Table tab The SNMPv3 Access Table tab is shown in Figure 116 System Configuration General SNMPvi amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Help U Yi Ai Gi Notif T t Add T t P t Table Table Table Table Table nobl
193. guration Menu Management Card 107 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card The columns in the Module Configuration Menu are described in Table 10 Table 10 Module Configuration Menu for a Management Card Column Description Port The port type is 10 100Base TX Link The status of the link on the port Possible values are O Online The port has established a link to a network device O Offline The port is not connected to a network device or has not established a link to a device Speed The operating speed of the port Possible values are 10M or 100M Mode The duplex mode of the port o Full The port is operating in full duplex mode o Half The port is operating in half duplex mode 3 Select Port A 100Base TX to display the Port Configuration Menu shown in Figure 35 f Port Configuration Menu x Module 1 Port A 100Base TX Link State online gt Auto negotiate Manual negotiate S Return to Module Management mMenu m Figure 35 Port Configuration Menu for the 10 100Base TX Port on the Management Card 4 Configure the settings of the port as needed To activate Auto Negotiation select Auto negotiate To set the speed and duplex mode manually select Manual negotiate to display the additional parameters shown in Figure 36 108 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide E Port Configuration Menu Es Module 1 Port A 100
194. gure 114 SNMPv3 View Table Tab A knowledge of the OID table is required to create view entities You can be very specific about the view a user can or cannot access down to a column or row of the table The AT S99 Management Software program of the AT CV5MO2 Management Card supports the Internet subtree of the OID table The parameters for SNMPv3 View Table entries are defined in Table 29 Table 29 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters Parameter Description View Name A descriptive name for this view of up to 32 alphanumeric characters Note The defaultViewAIl value is the default entry for the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c configuration You cannot use this default value for an SNMPv3 View Table entry 252 View Subtree The subtree that this view will or will not be permitted to display You can enter either a numeric value in hex format or the equivalent text name For example the OID hex format for TCP IP is 1 3 6 1 2 1 6 The text format is for TCP IP is tcp AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 29 SNMPv3 View Table Parameters Parameter Description Subtree Mask A subtree mask in hexadecimal format This is an optional parameter used to further refine the value in the View Subtree parameter This parameter is in binary format The relationship between a subtree mask and a subtree is similar to the relationship between an IP address and a subnet mask The subnet mask further r
195. gure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide SNMPv3 Message Notification Process ssesssssseseseeneeeen eene nennen nne nnne nes 243 Configure SNMPv3 User Table Menu ssesseeneene emere emere errem en nene enne 248 SNMPv3 User Table T ab rer RR nr HER D ERR eR UL DE RES eer SEL nage 249 Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu ssessseeeeeen nennen nennen AEEA EAE nennen enr en nene nnne nes 251 SNMPv3 View Table Tab eorr tete ted e eH DD Dare iaaa ains 252 Configure SNMPv3 Access Table Menu ssssssseeeeeeeen nennen ennemi enne nennen nennen 254 SNMPv3 Access Table Tab ene ederent Harm R Lt ERR er Epp cH RR een aedi deer gaai 255 Configure SNMPv3 Group Table Menu ssseeseeeeenene enne enne en nene enne nes 258 SNMPv3 Group Table Tab eee oed dette ce eter E TRE Une dede ee Doce tpe s 259 Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table Menu sssseseeenenenneenen nennen nennen nere errem eren nne nnne nes 261 SNMPv3 Notify Table Tab onere creen atento ded ee ene ded guvedeceddaedete dues devecestnreevecetenses 262 Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table Menu sseeeeeene enne nemen nnne 264 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Tab cni inerte deerit dette penetret e edere ere deus 265 Config
196. guring authentication and privacy protocols With the SNMPv3 protocol users are authenticated when they send and receive messages In addition you can configure a privacy protocol and password so messages a user sends and receives are encrypted The DES privacy algorithm uses the privacy password and the Engine ID to generate a key that is used for encryption Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this user and its related configuration to flash memory SNMPv3 View Table The Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu allows you to create a view of the MIB OID Table First you configure a view of a subtree Then you have the option of configuring a Subtree Mask that further refines the subtree view For example you can use a Subtree Mask to restrict a user s view to one row of the MIB OID Table In addition you can chose to include or exclude a view As a result you can let a user see a particular view or prevent a user from seeing a particular view Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this view to flash memory SNMPv3 Access Table The Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu allows you to configure a security group After you create a security group you assign a set of users with the same access privileges to this group using the SNMPv3 Group Table Consider the types of groups you want to create and the types of access privileges each group will have In
197. h 1242 1242 1243 through 1247 1247 1248 through 1253 1253 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1259 through 1264 1264 1265 through 1269 1269 1270 through 1275 1275 1276 through 1281 1281 1282 through 1287 1287 1288 through 1292 1292 1293 through 1298 1298 1299 through 1304 1304 1305 through 1310 1310 1311 through 1316 1316 1317 through 1322 1322 1323 through 1328 1328 1329 through 1335 1335 1336 through 1341 1341 1342 through 1347 1347 1348 through 1354 1354 1355 through 1360 1360 1361 through 1367 1367 1368 through 1373 1373 1374 through 1380 1380 1381 through 1386 1386 1387 through 1393 1393 1394 through 1400 1400 1401 through 1407 1407 1408 through 1414 1414 1415 through 1421 1421 1422 through 1428 1428 1429 through 1435 1435 307 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 308 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1436 through 1443 1443 1444 through 1450 1450 1451 through 1457 1457 1458 through 1465 1465 1466 through 1472 1472 1473 through 1480 1480 1481 through 1488 1488 1489 through 1495 1495 1496 through
198. hapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Redundant Management Cards instructions can be found in Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 181 C You have to configure a remote line card for remote peer management before you can remotely restore a previous configuration For instructions refer to Configuring the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards for the OAM based Features on page 74 When the AT CV5000 Chassis has two management cards the active card responds to specific events by automatically copying its master configuration file to the standby card The file is sent over the backplane of the chassis In this manner the standby card always has the same master configuration file as the active card Thus if the active card is removed from the chassis or fails the standby card when it transitions to the active state will operate with the same parameter settings as its predecessor Here are the events that cause an active management card to share its master configuration file with a standby card C When you issue one of the save commands the active card updates its master configuration file in flash memory and then transmits the changes to the standby card O When the AT CV5000 Chassis is powered on the two management cards initialize their AT S99 Management Software programs and afterwards share their slot numbers to ascertain which is the active card The card in the lowered numbered slot than transitions to the acti
199. hapter 3 Starting a Management Session 66 The web browser windows also have this command for local and remote line cards Figure 16 shows the location of the command in the web browser windows for a local line card Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Help Setting Line Card Configuration n urrent Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration Configuration Configuration Slot Number 5 Module AT CM202 Operation Mode OAM Visible C Save Current Configuration B Current Configuration Port A 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Manual negotiate Duplex Half Figure 16 Save Command in the Line Card Configuration Menu for a Local AT CM Line Card Here are the functions of the commands O Save System and All Line Card Configuration Though this is the last of the save commands in the Configuration Menu it is mentioned here first because it ll probably be the one you use most often That s because of all the same commands it performs the most comprehensive update of the master configuration file in flash memory When you select this command the management card copies its entire master configuration file in DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage You will find that the last step in many of the procedures in this guide reminds you to save your changes with this command O Save System Configuration This command updates the master
200. have a management card This is the default setting O UART Back Plane Mode Select this setting to configure the T1 E1 ports using a management card Do not select this setting if the card will be deployed at a remote site in a chassis that does not have a management card 6 Atthe confirmation prompt type Y to implement your change or type N to cancel it 7 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System and All Line Card Configurations 195 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card Configuring the T1 E1 Ports from the AT CV5M02 Management Card To configure the T1 E1 ports on the AT CM70S Line Card from the menus in the AT CV5MO2 Management Card 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 Select the AT CM70S Line Card you want to configure 3 From the line card s Module Configuration Menu select TDM LIU E1 T1 Configuration to display the menu in Figure 83 on page 194 4 From the TDM Management Menu select TDM Port Configurations to display the LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu shown in Figure 85 Note If the TDM Port Configurations selection is not included in the TDM Management Menu you need to set the card s UART setting to the backplane mode For instructions refer to Selecting the Managemen
201. he Auto copy Feature Menus These procedures set the auto copy feature on the chassis slots that contain AT CM Line Cards Auto copy determines the source of the configuration settings of a line card A line card in a slot where this feature is disabled use the configuration file in its own flash memory to set its parameters whenever it is reset or powered on In contrast a line card in a slot where this feature is enabled receives its configuration settings from the management card on the master configuration file For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 Review the following before performing these procedures o The auto copy setting for a slot is stored in the master configuration file on the management card It is not stored in the configuration file in the flash memory of a line card Consequently the AT CM Line Cards do not carry this setting with them when you install them in different slots or chassis The auto copy feature is not supported on the AT CM70S Line Card or the AT CV Line Cards To set the auto copy feature from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed
202. he master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and click Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card Menus The procedures in this section activate the standby AT CV5M02 Management Card in a chassis that has two management cards You might perform these procedures if the currently active management card is experiencing problems and you want to use the standby card to manage the chassis For background information refer to Redundant Management Cards on page 26 These procedures do not interrupt the operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis However they do end your management session To activate the standby management card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Management Card Redundancy to display the Management Card Redundancy Menu shown in Figure 41 E Management Card Redundancy Menu N Switch Over Management Cards Copy Active Card Configuration to Standby Card Save Current Configuration of Standby Card AREUM to Administration Menu E Figure 40 Management Card Redundancy Menu 2 Select Switch Over Management Cards The following confirmation prompt is displayed a Converteon E Do Management Card switch over Yes or No Yes NO sd to Management Card Redundancy Menu p Figure 41 Confirm
203. he terms and conditions of the warranty and for warranty registration New releases of the management software for our managed products are available from the following Internet sites Oo Allied Telesis web site www alliedtelesis com 3 Allied Telesis FTP server ftp ftp alliedtelesis com If the FTP server prompts you to log on enter anonymous as the user name and your email address as the password Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card The sections in this chapter are uuuuuu u uai ii Bi g g uu ui uiu The Converteon Product Line on page 20 AT CV5M01 and AT CV5MO2 Management Cards on page 21 AT S99 Management Software on page 22 Console Port on page 22 10 100Base TX Port on page 22 IP Address Configuration on page 23 Event Log on page 23 Activity Monitor on page 23 Syslog Client on page 23 Network Time Protocol Client on page 24 Manager and Operator Accounts on page 24 Management Access on page 25 Redundant Management Cards on page 26 Access to Your Network on page 28 Configuration Files on page 29 Converteon Chassis on page 34 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card The Converteon Product Line 20 The Converteon product line consists of modular fiber optic media converters that connect Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet networks across distances of up to forty kilometers The major components of the product line are o AT CM Media Conve
204. hrough 1020 1020 1021 through 1024 1024 1025 through 1027 1027 1028 through 1031 1031 1032 through 1035 1035 1036 through 1038 1038 1039 through 1042 1042 1043 through 1046 1046 1047 through 1050 1050 1051 through 1054 1054 1055 through 1058 1058 1059 through 1062 1062 1063 through 1066 1066 1067 through 1070 1070 1071 through 1074 1074 1075 through 1078 1078 1079 through 1082 1082 1083 through 1086 1086 1087 through 1090 1090 1091 through 1094 1094 1095 through 1098 1098 1099 through 1103 1103 1104 through 1107 1107 1108 through 1111 1111 1112 through 1116 1116 305 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 306 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 1117 through 1120 1120 1121 through 1124 1124 1125 through 1129 1129 1130 through 1133 1133 1134 through 1138 1138 1139 through 1142 1142 1143 through 1147 1147 1148 through 1152 1152 1153 through 1156 1156 1157 through 1161 1161 1162 through 1166 1166 1167 through 1170 1170 1171 through 1175 1175 1176 through 1180 1180 1181 through 1185 1185 1186 through 1190 1190 1191 through 1195 1195 1196 through 1200 1200 1201 through 1205 1205 1206 through 1210 1210 1211 through 1215 1215 1216 through 1221 1221 1222 through 1226 1226 1227 through 1231 1231 1232 through 1236 1236 1237 throug
205. ilure on Remote Line Card 7 236 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 This chapter provides a description of the AT S99 implementation of the SNMPv3 protocol In addition the chapter contains procedures that allow you to create and modify SNMPv3 entities The following sections are provided Q SNMPv3 Overview on page 238 Configuring SNMPv3 Entities on page 247 Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table on page 248 Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 251 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 254 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table on page 258 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 261 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 264 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 267 uuuuuuiuiu 237 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Overview 238 The SNMPv3 protocol builds on the existing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocol implementation In SNMPv3 User based Security Model USM authentication is implemented along with encryption allowing you to configure a secure SNMP environment In addition SNMP terminology changes in the SNMPv3 protocol In the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c protocols the terms agent and manager are used An agent is an SNMP user while a manager is an SNMP host In the SNMPv3 protocol agents and managers are called entities In any SNMPv3 communication there is an authoritative entity and a non authoritative entity The autho
206. ine Card Module Software Image Version b Converteon Module App Ver BootLdr ver 1 AT CV5M02 v3 0 0 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 5 Area2a AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 6 Area2b AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 7 Regl2 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 8 Reg5 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 9 Regl7 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 10 AT CV102 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14s ssania AT CV102 SS 15 Unequipped 16 Unequipped 17 Unequipped H 18 Unequipped tiit any key to continue e Figure 80 Remote Line Card Module Software Image Version Window 187 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 188 Web Browser The columns in the window are described in Table 22 Table 22 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers the names and the model names of the local AT CM Line Cards in the chassis that has the management card App Ver This column displays the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software on the remote AT CM Line Cards BootLdr This column displays the version numbers of the Ver bootloader files on the remote AT CM Line Cards To view the version numbers of the AT S73 Management Software and bootloader files on remote AT CM Line Cards from the web browser
207. initializes its management software D Examines the new master configuration file for the auto copy settings for the chassis slots and sends the configuration settings to those AT CM Line Card that are installed in slots where auto copy is enabled During this process which takes about two minutes to complete the management card will be unresponsive to commands 7T To resume managing the chassis start a new management session 8 Ifthe chassis has two management cards reinstall the standby card After the standby card has initialized its management software the active management card automatically sends the new master configuration file to the standby card over the backplane of the chassis To download the master configuration file to the management card from the web browser windows 1 Click Configuration from the menus bar 2 Click the Files tab The tab is shown in Figure 130 on page 282 3 In the Configuration File Download section of the tab select the TFTP Server IP Address field and enter the IP address of the TFTP server on your network 4 Select the Configuration File Name field and enter a filename of the configuration file on the TFTP server The extension should be cfg 5 Click Download After receiving the new file the management card does the following o Writes the file to flash memory CD Reboots and initializes its management software O Examines the new master configuration file for the au
208. ion Example 246 You may want to have two classes of SNMPv3 users Managers and Operators In this scenario you would configure one group called Managers with full access privileges Then you would configure a second group called Operators with monitoring privileges only For a detailed example of this configuration see Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples on page 291 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring SNMPv3 Entities The following sections describe how to configure SNMPv3 entities using the SNMPv3 Tables To successfully configure this protocol you must perform the procedures in the order given here For overview information about SNMPv3 see the SNMPv3 Overview on page 238 The following SNMPv3 tables are described Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table next Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table on page 251 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 254 Configuring the SNMPv3 Group Table on page 258 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 261 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 264 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 267 u uuuuiuouiu The SNMPv3 User View Access and Group tables are concerned with setting up a user determining authentication and privacy and associating a user to a security group The SNMPv3 Notify Target Address and Target Parameters tables are concerned with message notific
209. ion 2 AT CM202 1 Version 2 AT CM202 2 Version 2 AT CM212A 1 Version 2 AT CM212B 1 Version 2 AT CM70S Version 2 AT CM2KOS Version 3 C Refer to Table 4 for the required version numbers of the management software Table 4 Versions of the Management Software that Support Dying Gasp Management and Media Converter Line Cards Management Software Versions AT CV5M01 Management Card Version 2 0 2 or later of the AT S70 Management Software AT CV5M02 Management Card Version 3 0 0 or later of the AT S99 Management Software AT CM Line Cards Version 2 0 2 or later of the AT S73 Line Card Management Software O If you install a management card in the remote AT CV1203 Chassis so that the chassis can send the st failure signal you do not have to configure the card nor do you have to connect its 10 100Base TX port to the network The card simply has to be present in the AT CV1203 Chassis 54 OAM Variable Requests AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide This feature is part of the IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM standard It allows you to view the performance and error statistics that are stored in the Management Information Bases MIBs on remote OAM devices To use the feature you specify the branch and leaf of the object identifier OID of the MIB object you want to view These are the last two parts of an OID The prefix of the OID is predefined in the OAM clients on the line
210. is the default setting When a port is disabled it doesn t forward traffic You might disable a port if there is a problem with the cable or with the network device connected to it You might also disable unused ports to secure them from unauthorized connections Flow Control Enable Flow Control Disable Flow control regulates the flow of network traffic on ports set to full duplex mode When flow control is enabled on a port on a line card the port issues pause packets whenever it needs to stop the network device from sending packets The default setting for flow control is enabled 141 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 16 Port Configuration Menu for Both Fiber Optic Ports and Twisted Pair Ports Setting Description Auto negotiate Manual negotiate Full Half Hundred Base lt 100Base TX gt Ten Base lt 10Base T gt These selections control the speed and duplex mode settings of the twisted pair ports on the AT CM Line Cards The Auto negotiate setting the default setting activates IEEE 802 1u Auto Negotiation which configures the speed and duplex mode automatically The Manual negotiate setting deactivates Auto Negotiation on a port so that the parameters can be set manually Selecting this option displays additional settings The Full and Half settings establish the duplex mode of the port which can be either full duplex or half duplex The Hundred Base a
211. ished with the management cable that ships with the card and a terminal or a PC with a terminal emulator program The management card does not need an IP address for local management Your initial management session of a management card has to be a local session For instructions refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 The management card has a Telnet server for remote management from Telnet clients on your network Because this type of management is performed over the network you may find it more convenient than local management which has to be performed at the wiring closet where the chassis is located Remote Telnet management also referred to as in band management uses the same menus as local management and supports all of the same management capabilities The requirements for remote Telnet managed are detailed in Access to Your Network on page 28 For further instructions refer to Starting a Telnet Management Session on page 61 The AT CV5M02 Management Card has web browser windows that you can use as alternatives to the menus for managing the device remotely from a web browser on your workstation on the network They support nearly all of the same management functions as the menus The requirements for remote web browser management are detailed in Access to Your Network on page 28 To start this type of management session refer to Starting a Web Browser Management Session on page 62 The management card ca
212. isplays the operational state of the OAM client on Port A the fiber optic port on a remote line card The possible states are Operational A Active Send Local D Disabled L Active Send Local M Peer Remote Reject P or W Passive Wait R Peer Local Reject 1 Active Send Remote 1 2 Active Send Remote 2 B This alternates between and o when a remote fiber optic port is transmitting OAMPDUs Otherwise it remains o C This alternates between and o when a remote fiber optic port is receiving OAMPDUs Otherwise it remains o AN This column displays the status of Auto Negotiation on the twisted pair ports on the remote AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Auto Negotiation is enabled on the port The speed and duplex mode are set automatically This is the default setting o N Auto Negotiation is disabled on the port The speed and duplex mode were set manually 178 Note Remote peer management requires that the local and remote line cards be in the OAM operational state Reaching that state may take a line card up to two minutes when it is powered on because it has to initialize its management software and negotiate the OAM state with its counterpart Naming a Remote Line Card AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 2 To configure a remote line card select the card in the menu This Va displays the Remote Module Configuratio
213. ity Monitor on page 104 Configuring the Syslog Client on page 105 Configuring the 10 100Base TX Port on page 107 Restoring the Default Setting on the 10 100Base TX Port on page 112 Restoring the Default Values on the AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 113 Configuring the Temperature Threshold on page 115 Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 117 Setting the Baud Rate of the Console Port on page 119 Displaying the Operational Status of the Chassis on page 121 Pinging Network Devices on page 125 Displaying Management Card Information on page 126 79 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Assigning an IP Address Configuration This section explains how to assign an IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the management card A management card can have only one IP address configuration The address can be assigned manually or from a DHCP server on your network For background information refer to IP Address Configuration on page 23 Menus To assign an IP address configuration to the card from the menus 80 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 Ad Configuration Menu System Configuration Save System Configuration Save All Line Card Configurations Save System and All Line Card Configurations Return System Configuration to Default Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP Re
214. le 1 on page 37 this card has an A version and a B version The fiber optic port on the version A card has to be connected to the fiber optic port on the version B card The AT CM7068S Line Card also has to be used in pairs It combines the traffic from one 10 100Base T Ethernet port and four T1 E1 ports onto a single fiber optic port on an SFP transceiver But unlike the AT CM212 Line Card this card does not have two versions The AT CM Line Cards use the AT S73 Management Software which comes preinstalled on the line cards with default settings for all of the operating parameters You do not have direct access to this software To configure these cards you have to use the AT CV5M02 Management Card which passes your changes to the line cards through the chassis backplane AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The AT CM70S Line Card is an exception to this rule because it has an RS 232 port for local management of the T1 E1 ports when the card is installed in a chassis that does not have a management card For further information refer to Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card on page 191 39 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CV Media Converter Line Cards The AT CV Line Cards are two port media converters They have a twisted pair port that connects to a local Ethernet network and a fiber optic port that connects to the remote network over eith
215. le 12 Chassis Diagnostics Menu Row Description Flash This field displays the status of the Flash PROM on the PROM management card Serial This field displays the status of the Console port on the Interface management card RPSA and This field displays the status of the power supplies and RPSB fans and the temperature and power voltage in the AT CV5000 Chassis A status of Not present indicates an empty power supply slot in the AT CV5000 Chassis Neither the AT CV1200 Chassis nor the AT CV1203 Chassis display this information To view the operational information from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Administrator from the menu bar Select the Diagnostics tab If the Chassis Diagnostics tab shown in Figure 47 is not selected select it This window is for viewing purposes only The information in the window is described in Table 12 on page 122 123 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 124 Administration General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics Diagnostics Chassis Linecard Image Remote Linecard Linecard SFP Information Image Information Information Information Chassis Information Serial Number 402736 Mac Address 00 A0 D2 00 00 11 Converteon Chassis CV 5000 XX Running D days 0 hours 4 minutes 40 hours Current Time 00 00 00 00 04 38 Chassis Dianostics Flash PROM Good Serial Interface Good RPSA Good Tempera
216. locks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 270 In an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry the Security Name parameter is linked to the User Name parameter on the SNMPv3 User Table In an SNMPv3 User Table entry the User Name parameter is used as an index for the entry Because the User Name and Security Name parameters are linked the information you configure that relates to a User Table entry must match the information you configure in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry In addition the values configured for the following parameters in an SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table entry must match those configured in the corresponding table entry M g M m User Name parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table View Name parameter in the SNMPv3 View Table Group Name Security Model and Security Level parameters in the SNMPv3 Access Table User Name Security Model Group Name parameters in the SNMPv3 Group Table A Caution If the values of the Security Model parameter in the SNMPv3 User Table and the SNMPv3 Target Parameter Table entry do not match notificatio
217. lot and the 10 100 1000Base T port on the line card cannot be set through the Console port To configure the T1 E1 ports from the Console port on the AT CM70S Line Card 1 Configure the settings on your terminal or terminal emulator program as follows 0 Bits per second 115200 o Data bits 8 D Parity None O Stop bits 1 ao Flow control None 0 Echo typed characters locally Enabled Note The settings on the Console port on the line card are not adjustable 2 Connect the management cable included with the AT CM70S Line Card to the Console port on the card and to the RS 232 port on your terminal or computer 3 If the card is already running the terminal screen will be blank To display the card s menu shown in Figure 88 type m for menu and press Return 199 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 200 Command gt SN A d AT CM70S Local Console Menu Boot Configuration a Boot Data From Customized in EEPROM b LIU Mode T1 Current Status T1 with B8ZS Coding All 4 channels Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 1 Rec Sens Set Long Haul Long Haul Long Haul Long Haul 2 Line Build Out DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU DSX 1 0 CSU 3 Transmit All 1s Normal Normal Normal Normal lt 4 gt PRBS Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled lt 5 gt Remote Loopback Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enter lt Item gt lt space g
218. lot number Single Remote Line Card Bootloader Select this option to upgrade the bootloader on a single remote AT CM Line Card through the remote peer management feature After you select this option you are prompted for the slot number of the local line card that is connected to the remote line card you want to upgrade You can specify only one slot number 277 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files After you ve selected a download and provided the necessary information the management card begins to download the file s by using the information in the TFTP Image Download tab to contact the TFTP server Note To prevent damaging a management card or a line card do not power off the chassis or remove a card while it is writing the file to flash memory 278 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM The procedure in this section explains how to use XMODEM to download new versions of the management software programs to the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards Unlike TFTP downloads which allow you to update multiple line cards at the same time XMODEM downloads can only update one card at a time Note Allied Telesis recommends that you save the current configurations of all the AT CM Line Cards in the master configuration file before performing these procedures For instructions refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64
219. low from its network device Traffic above the threshold is discarded by the port 142 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 16 Port Configuration Menu for Both Fiber Optic Ports and Twisted Pair Ports Setting Description Ingress Rate Limit The Egress Rate Limit controls the number of bits per Egress Rate Limit Continued second a port transmits to the network device connected to it Again traffic that exceeds the limit is discarded before it is transmitted by the port Port Statistics For information on this menu option refer to Displaying Port Statistics on page 160 Web Browser 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration To configure the parameter settings of the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the left menu bar In the Chassis View click the line card port you want to configure Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Port A tab to configure the fiber optic port on the media converter line card or the Port B tab to configure the twisted pair port You can configure only one port at a time 143 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter
220. ly monitors the state of the active card over the backplane inside the AT CV5000 Chassis If the active card fails or is reset or removed from the chassis the standby card automatically transitions to the active state usually within twenty seconds If a second management card is installed while the chassis is powered on the new management card is placed in the standby mode even if it occupies a lower numbered slot than the active management card However if the chassis is later power cycled or the active card is reset the management card in the lower numbered slot becomes the active card The management software has an option to force the two management cards to change states You might choose to use this option if the active card is experiencing difficulties and you want to use the standby card to perform your management tasks The switchover however is not permanent The active and standby states are again determined according to their slot numbers the next time the chassis is power cycled For instructions refer to Activating a Standby AT CV5M02 Management Card on page 117 The requirements and guidelines for redundant AT CV5M02 Management Cards are 0 This feature is not supported on the AT CV5MO1 Management Card o There can be only one redundant management card o You can install the active and standby management cards in any of the slots in the AT CV5000 Chassis Status Messages AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software Us
221. m the chassis The second master configuration file on the AT CV5M02 Management Card is stored in flash memory and so is retained even when the chassis is powered off This master configuration file however is not updated automatically Instead you have to instruct the management card to do it by issuing one of the save commands When you enter a save command the management card copies the master configuration file in DRAM to flash memory for permanent storage For information on the save commands refer to Saving Your Configuration Changes on page 64 Here are the steps that the management card and the line cards perform when one of their parameter settings is changed 1 When you enter a new setting on a line card the management card 29 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Restoring Configurations to 30 AT CM Line Cards sends the change to the designated card over the backplane of the chassis 2 The line card implements the change and updates its configuration file in flash memory so that it retains the change even if you remove the line card or power off the chassis 3 The management card automatically updates its master configuration file in DRAM the next time it polls the line card which it does every few seconds 4 The next time you issue a save command the management card copies the master configuration file from DRAM to flash memory Note Unless stated otherwise all future references to the mast
222. measurements are given in frames bytes octets and bits Test frames are sixty octets in length To clear the counters click Clear Loopback Statistics To stop the test change the OAM Loopback Test field to Stop by clicking Edit and selecting Stop from the pull down menu The line card stops transmitting test packets To resume normal network operations on the line cards change the Remote Loopback field to Disable by clicking Edit and selecting Disable from the pull down menu The local and remote line cards resume forwarding network traffic 213 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client Displaying OAM Information for Local OAM Clients 214 Menus The procedures in this section explain how to view OAM status information on local OAM clients on the AT CM Line Cards Note For you to view OAM information the AT CM Line Cards have to be set to the OAM visible mode To display status information for local OAM clients from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 Select the local line card whose OAM information you want to view This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 Select Port A to display the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 on page 140 OAM is only
223. ment The AT CM Line Cards support five OAM based features on their fiber optic ports Some of the features are part of the IEEE 802 3ah standard and others are specific to this product The features are Remote Peer Management next Remote Updates of the AT S73 Management Software on page 50 OAM Loopback Tests on page 51 Dying Gasp Feature on page 52 u uuu iu OAM Variable Requests on page 55 This feature also known as peer to peer management makes it easier to manage your remote line cards because you can configure them through their local counterparts in a managed chassis This saves you from having to travel to the remote sites when you need to configure the cards or having to install management cards in all of the remote chassis To manage a remote card you start a local or remote management session on the chassis that has the management card You then redirect the session to the remote card by selecting its local counterpart The remote management sessions are conducted over the fiber optic cables that link the local and remote line cards The sessions do not interfere with the network operations of the line cards This feature is illustrated in Figure 1 on page 47 Residing at a central location is the AT CV5000 Chassis with the AT CV5M02 Management Card To manage the remote card you select its local counterpart in slot 11 This establishes a management connection to the remote line card over th
224. ment function is not supported from the web browser windows 125 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Displaying Management Card Information To view general information about the AT CV5M02 Management Card refer to Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software on page 164 and Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers on page 167 126 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards This chapter has the following sections Q Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 128 Q Displaying the Parameter Settings on AT CM Line Cards on page 136 Configuring the Port Parameters on AT CM Line Cards on page 139 Setting the Operating Mode on page 145 Assigning Names to AT CM Line Cards on page 149 u uuu Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on AT CM2KOS Line Cards on page 150 Setting the Auto copy Feature on page 151 Restoring the Default Settings on page 153 Restoring the Last Saved Configuration on page 157 Displaying Port Statistics on page 160 Resetting Media Converter Line Cards on page 162 o2 uuuiuouiu Displaying the Version Numbers of the Management Software on page 164 Q Displaying the MAC Addresses and Serial Numbers on page 167 Q Displaying SFP Module Information on page 170 127 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the Status of the Line
225. meter settings while it initializes the management software which takes approximately one minute Afterwards the card configures its operating parameters from the settings in its configuration file or from the management card The AT CV Line Cards do not have management software and immediately resume normal network operations Menus To change the operating modes of the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the line card you want to configure You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed From the Module Configuration Menu select Configure Operating Mode to display the Operating Mode Config Menu shown in Figure 57 The menu lists the available operating modes for the line card The AT CV Media Converter Line Cards do not support the OAM bypass and OAM visible modes T Operating Mode Config Menu E Module 4 Smart Missing Link Mode Missing Link Mode OAM BYPASS Mode OAM Visible Mode Link Test Mode Line Card DIP Switch Mode io Return to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 57 Operating Mode Config Menu 145 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 146 4 Select the new operating mode for the line card
226. mitted by the port This Packets statistic is only available on the AT CM2KOS Line Card AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 17 Port Statistics Row Description CRC Errors The number of received packets with CRC errors Collisions The number of collisions on the port This statistic is applicable only when a port is operating in the half duplex mode Web Browser To display the traffic statistics for the ports on the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click one of the ports of the line card whose statistics you want to view Or select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can view the statistics of only one line card at a time 3 Select the Port A tab to view the statistics for the fiber optic port or the Port B tab to view the statistics for the twisted pair port 4 Click the Port Statistics tab to display the Port Statistics window for the port you selected The example in Figure 67 is for Port B the twisted pair port on the AT CM202 Line Card The window has four statistics counters However only the AT CM2KOS Line Card supports all four counters The other AT CM Line Cards support just the CRC errors counter and the collisions counter Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Help Setting Line Card Configuration
227. n File Download TFTP Server IP Address Configuration File Name Download Figure 130 Files Tab 282 3 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Note If you want to update the master configuration file before uploading it to the TFTP server click the radio button for Save System Configuration and All Card Configurations and click Apply in the Files tab In the Configuration File Upload section of the tab select the TFTP Server IP Address field and enter the IP address of the TFTP server on your network Select the Configuration File Name field and enter a filename for the configuration file The file will be stored with this name on the TFTP server The extension should be cfg Click Upload The management card sends the its configuration file to the TFTP server 283 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Downloading the Master Configuration File to a Management Card Menus These procedures are used to download a master configuration file to a management card This procedures use TFTP and can be performed from either a local management session or a remote Telnet or web browser management session of the management card Note The current configuration settings of the management card will be overwritten by the configuration settings contained in the downloaded file This includes the IP address subnet mask and DHCP status A Caution These procedures ma
228. n Menu shown in Figure 77 Module AT CM202 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseFX online 100M Full B 100BaseTX online 100M Full Module Name Module Name Remote Module Configuration Menu h Converteon Module 1 Line Card Configuration Return to Remote Module Status and Configuration E Figure 77 Remote Module Configuration Menu The menu displays the current settings of the two ports on the remote line card The columns are described in Table 15 on page 139 Note You cannot disable ports or change the operating modes or the OAM settings on remote line cards Your changes to the parameter settings on a remote line are automatically saved in the card s configuration file in flash memory They are retained even if the remote chassis is powered off or the card is removed from the unit For further information refer to Configuration Files on page 29 When you finish configuring the remote line card return to the Remote Module Configuration Menu and select Return to Remote Module Status and Configuration to display the Remote Module Status and Configuration menu again To assign a name to a remote line card 1 From the Remote Module Configuration Menu select the Module Name field 2 Enter a name of up to eight alphanumeric characters 179 Chapter 6 Configuring AT CM Line Cards with Remote Peer Management 180 Displaying the Current Configuration Configuring Remote Ports Restoring the D
229. n be managed with a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP program like HP Openview This type of management requires a familiarity with Management Information Bases MIBs To manage the product with SNMP load and compile the ATCV5000 mib file found on the Allied Telesis web site into your SNMP program 25 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Redundant Management Cards 26 You can install two AT CV5M02 Management Cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis The second card functions as a backup card should the primary management card fail or have to be removed from the chassis When the AT CV5000 Chassis has two management cards one of the cards functions as the active card The other is placed in a standby mode Your local and remote management sessions have to be performed through the active card You can discern the states of the cards by examining their RDY LEDs On the active card this LED will be on it will be off on the standby card The management cards automatically determine their active and standby states when the chassis is powered on Their states are based on their chassis slot numbers The management card in the lower numbered slot acts as the active card and the card in the higher numbered slot functions as the standby card For example if two management cards are installed in slots 3 and 5 of the chassis the card in slot 3 becomes the active card and the card in slot 5 is the standby card The standby card continuous
230. n messages are not generated on behalf of this User Security Name Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files The procedures in this chapter explain how to update the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards The sections in the chapter include D Overview on page 272 D Configuring the TFTP Client on page 273 o Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP on page 275 M Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM on page 279 Q Uploading the Master Configuration File from a Management Card on page 281 Q Downloading the Master Configuration File to a Management Card on page 284 271 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Overview Allied Telesis may periodically release new versions of the management software for the Converteon management cards and line cards New releases are available from the company s web site Note Before installing new software read the software release notes that are included with a new release to determine whether there are any special restrictions or guidelines The cards in the Converteon product line use the following management software programs o The AT CV5MO2 Management Card uses the AT S99 Management Software o The AT CM Media Converter Line Cards use the AT S73 Management Software and bootloader file o The AT CV Media Converter Line Cards do not use managemen
231. n the System Information section click Edit 4 Select the NTP Server field in the popup window and enter the IP address of the NTP server 5 Select Enable from the NTP pull down menu to activate the client Or to disable the client select Disable 6 Click Update 7T To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply 95 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Resetting the Management Card 96 Menus This procedure is used to reset the management card in the chassis You might reset the card if it is experiencing a problem You can also reset the card using the CPU Reset button on the card s front panel Review the following information before resetting the management card o In most situations resetting the management card should not affect the network operations of the media converter line cards in the chassis However if you ve changed but not saved the parameter settings of a media converter line card in a slot where the auto copy feature is enabled the line card will revert to its previous settings after the management card resets This may affect the operations of the line card Any changes you ve made to the parameter settings of the management card but not saved in the master configuration file are discarded when the card is reset To save the parameter setting
232. n the management card has to be connected to a network device such as a Fast Ethernet switch The DHCP requests are transmitted from that port o If the card already has a static IP address the address is overwritten by the address from the DHCP server O When the client is activated the management card issues two requests for an IP address configuration from the DHCP server If the DHCP server does not respond the management card operates without an IP address configuration Click Update If you changed the IP address of the management card your management session ends To continue managing the unit and to save your changes start a new management session with the card s new IP address To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply Assigning a Name AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Menus Web Browser By assigning a name to the management card you make the card and the chassis easier to identify The name is displayed at the top of the menus of the management software during your local management sessions and remote Telnet sessions The web browser windows do not display the system name You can assign a name to the management card from the System Configuration Menu or the Omega Options Menu This procedure uses the System Configuration Menu To assign a name to
233. nd Ten Base selections set a port s speed to 100 or 10 Mbps respectively Here are guidelines for setting the speed or duplex mode on a port HB Ifthe network device connected to a port on a line card does not support Auto Negotiation and has a fixed duplex mode of full duplex disable Auto Negotiation on the port and set the speed and duplex mode manually to avoid a duplex mode mismatch O To operate at 1000 Mbps the twisted pair port on the AT CM2KOS Line Card has to be set to Auto Negotiation You can not manually set the port to 1000 Mbps MDI MDIX When the twisted pair port is set to Auto Negotiation the wiring configuration is set automatically with Auto MDI MDIX When Auto Negotiation is disabled the MDI MDIX setting is manually controlled with these two selections Ingress Rate Limit Egress Rate Limit These selections control the flow of network traffic to and from the ports on the AT CM Line Cards The rate limits which are in kilobits and megabits per second can be applied separately to the two ports on the line cards Rate limits are used for storm prevention and to protect against the formation of bottlenecks in a network topology The Ingress Rate Limit controls the number of bits per second a port accepts from the device connected to it The port discards any frames exceeding the limit For example an ingress rate limit of 128k limits a port to no more than 128 kilobits per second in traffic f
234. ne rennen nnne 50 OAM Loopback ccm E 51 DyigiGasp Fealture ide etn A UD REM i 52 OAM Variable Requests 2 erret codes Deere quiet Ree eot ONERE dni Ae rame d etat dut cie XX EE e Ex one E dave a denied 55 OAM Clierit Settirigs n rte EO a TEET 56 Chapter 3 Starting a Management Session sse enne nennen en nennen nene n ern enne 57 Starting a Local Management Session ssssssssssee eee enne nennen nensi nein enr en enne n nnne enr en nnne 58 Starting a Telnet Management Sessionin siie ideii enn en nens erret enn nennen nnne 61 Starting a Web Browser Management Session ssssssssssseeee nennen nennen nnne erret nnns en nnns ener nen nnne 62 Saving Your Configuration Changss e connerie nter emen necesites annes tr ka meia ei nena d anten adde eu digne du 64 What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card sss een eene nennen nennen 69 Changing the Manager and Operator Passwords sssssssssesseeeeen eene nennen nene nnnm nennen 69 Assigning an IP Address Configuration and Changing the Community Strings eee 70 Setting the Date and M NUR M RR 71 Naming the Management Card 2 eise cendi esee rideo deter iiei td dense re ad denos tee ddd ddiaa iaieiiea 72 Saving Your Changes pede eee Leserreise e reser oni te i np
235. new operating mode for the line card from the pull down menu You can select only one operating mode The Line Card DIP Switch Mode selection activates the DIP switches on the line card so that the operating mode is controlled with the switches instead of the management software Click Update The management card automatically updates its master configuration file with the new setting for the line card s operating mode Afterwards the Module Status and Configuration menu is displayed again The line card resets When the operating mode is changed on an AT CM Line Card the device has to initialize its management software and configure its operating parameters before resuming normal operations In contrast the AT CV Line Cards immediately return to 147 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards normal operations because the cards in that series do not have management software 148 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Assigning Names to AT CM Line Cards Menus Web Browser To assign names to the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the line card you want to name You can configure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed From
236. nfiguration by defining the type of message you want to send with the SNMPv3 Notify Table Then you define a IP address that is used for notification in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table This is the IP address of the SNMPv3 host Finally you associate the trap information with a user by configuring the Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Figure 110 illustrates of how the message notification tables are linked SNMPv3 Notify Table SNMPv3 Target Address Table SNMPv3 Target Parameter Table SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table SNMPv3 SecurityToGroup Table SNMPv3 Notify Table um ei a euim epee ee Linked by User Name or Security Name Linked by Security Name an Linked by View Name Security Model Figure 110 SNMPv3 Message Notification Process 243 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 244 For a more detailed description of the SNMPv3 Tables see the following subsections SNMPv3 User Table on page 244 SNMPv3 View Table on page 244 SNMPv3 Access Table on page 244 SNMPv3 Group Table on page 245 SNMPv3 Notify Table on page 245 SNMPv3 Target Address Table on page 245 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table on page 245 u uuuuiuiu SNMPv3 User Table The Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu allows you to create an SNMPv3 user and provides the options of confi
237. nform message the switch expects a response from the host In comparison the switch does not expect the host to respond to Trap messages In addition you define a Notify Tag that links an SNMPv3 Notify Table entry to the host IP address defined in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table menu allows you to configure the host IP address Also in the same table you configure the values of the Tag List parameter with the previously defined Notify Tag parameter values The Notify Tag parameter is configured in the Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table In this way the Notify and Target Address tables are linked Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table The Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table menu allows you to define which user can send messages to the host IP address defined in the Configure SNMPv3 Target Address Table The user and its associated information is previously configured in the Configure SNMPv3 User Table SNMPv3 View Table SNMPv3 Access Table and SNMPv3 Group Table Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory 245 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 SNMPv3 Configurat
238. ng The card has two settings UART local console mode and UART backplane mode The UART local console mode lets you configure the T1 E1 ports from the Console port on the card This setting which happens to be the default setting for the UART parameter is the appropriate setting for an AT CM70S Line Card that is installed in a chassis that doesn t have a management card If the card will be installed in a chassis that has a management card you should change the management method of the ports to the UART backplane mode This will allow you to configure the T1 E1 ports using the menus in the management software of the management card You ll be able to configure these ports much as you can any of the other ports on the card The term backplane refers to the backplane in the AT CV5000 Chassis There are a couple of other factors that need to be considered when choosing the UART setting for this card The AT CM70S Line Card supports the remote peer management feature for the 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet port and the SFP slot but not for the T1 E1 ports So even if you configure this card for remote peer management you will not be able to configure the T1 E1 ports on a remote card through that feature The AT CM70S Line Card is a multiplexer that combines the data streams from one 10 100 1000Base T Ethernet port and four T1 E1 lines onto a single SFP fiber optic port As such it has to be used in pairs However the cards do not need to ha
239. ng a new password enter a space in the password field Timeout This parameter is used to set the amount of time in minutes the management software waits before it automatically ends an inactive local or remote management session The management software automatically logs off a management session if there is no management activity for the duration of the timer This security feature can prevent unauthorized individuals from using your management station to alter the configuration settings of the media converter chassis should you step away from your system during a management session The console timer has a range of 1 to 60 minutes The default value is 10 minutes Local Omega Enabled These parameters are used to enable or disable the Console Disable Local Omega port on the management card When the Console port is disabled local management of the chassis through the RS 232 Console port is prohibited The default setting for the Console port is enabled If you disable local management during a local management session your current session is not interrupted However the card will not allow you to establish any new local management sessions 91 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 7 Omega Options Menu Parameter Description Remote Omega Enabled These parameters are used to enable or disable the Telnet No Remote Omega server on the management card The default setting
240. ngLink mode OAM visible mode OAM bypass mode u uuu iau The AT CV Line Cards support these operating modes D Link Test mode D MissingLink mode o Smart MissingLink mode The operating modes are used to determine the status of the links on the ports on the line cards to troubleshoot a link problem or in the case of the AT CM Line Cards to implement the OAM based features The operating modes are discussed in the following sections Link Test Mode next MissingLink Mode on page 43 Smart MissingLink Mode on page 44 OAM Visible Mode on page 45 OAM Bypass Mode on page 45 u uuu iu Contrary to its name the Link Test operating mode is not a diagnostic utility When a line card is operating in this mode the states of the links on the ports are reflected on the port LEDs and the management software A port s LED will be on and the port s status in the management software will be Online when the port has established a link to a network device Conversely a port s Link LED will be off and its status in the management software will be Offline when the port has not established a link to a network device This operating mode is typically used when the network devices connected to the ports of a line card cannot take advantage of the features of the MissingLink mode or when you want to use the Link LEDs or the management software to troubleshoot a network problem This operating mode is also useful after the ins
241. nged Some network traffic may be lost To set the UART setting on the AT CM70S Line Card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 2 Select the AT CM70S Line Card you want to configure The Module Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 3 From the Module Configuration Menu select 3 TDM LIU T1 E1 Configuration to display the TDM Management Menu shown in Figure 83 Ko TDM Management Menu TN Module 15 Port C TDM Port Configurations UART Configurations M GRERUIR to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 83 TDM Management Menu The TDM Port Configurations selection appears in the menu only when the line card s UART setting is set to UART backplane mode 4 From the TDM Management Menu select UART Configurations to display the UART Configuration Menu shown in Figure 84 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide a UART Configuration Menu E Module 15 Port C UART Local Console Mode UART Back Plane Mode ko Return to Port Configuration Menu P Figure 84 UART Configuration Menu 5 From the UART Configuration Menu select one of the following options O UART Local Console Mode Select this setting to configure the T1 E1 ports from the Console port on the line card This setting is appropriate for AT CM70S Line Cards in chassis that do not
242. nline 100 Online 100 OAM Visible Operational 10 AT CV102 On Online 100 Online 100 Link Test 11 AT Cvi02 On Online 100 Online 100 Link Test 12 AT CV102 On Online 100 Online 100 Link Test 13 AT CV102 On Online 100 Online 100 Link Test 14 AT CV102 On Online 100 Online 100 Link Test 15 Not Inserted 16 Not Inserted 17 Not Inserted 18 Not Inserted ale BED On 20 Not Inserted 21 RPSA On 22 RPSB Off Figure 50 Menu View Table 14 Module Status and Configuration Window Column Description Module This column lists the chassis slot numbers and the model names of the management cards and the line cards in the chassis Model names of newer versions of the AT CM Line Cards have suffixes like v2 Status This column displays the status of the cards The possible values are D On The card is operating normally D Off The line card is initializing its management software This state applies only to AT CM Line Cards O Standby The AT CV5M02 Management Card is in the standby state For background information refer to Redundant Management Cards on page 26 134 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 14 Module Status and Configuration Window Column Description Link A This column displays the states of Port A on the AT CM and AT CV Line Cards This is a fiber optic port on all of the line cards This column also displays the status of the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02
243. o Configuring the SNMPv3 Access Table on page 254 There are four default values for this field a defaultV1GroupReadOnly o defaultV1GroupReadWrite D defaultV2cGroupReadOnly D defaultV2cGroupReadWrite These values are reserved for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c implementations Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Group Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 260 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table The SNMPv3 Notify Table is used to create names for sending traps or inform messages The entry parameters in the SNMPv3 Notify Table are u uuu Notify Name Notify Tag Notify Type Storage Type The parameters are defined in Table 32 on page 262 To access the Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table from the menus o From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table The Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table menu is shown in Figure 119 fe Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table E Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry
244. o the UART Backplane Mode Figure 82 UART Setting on the AT CM70S Line Card Here are the general steps to configuring a pair of AT CM70S Line Cards 1 For the initial configuration install both AT CM70S Line Cards in an AT CV5000 Chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card Using the menus interface in the management card change the UART setting on both cards to UART backplane mode so that you can configure all of the card s parameter settings including the T1 E1 ports using the management card Using the management card configure all of the settings of the two AT CM70S Line Cards including the settings for the T1 E1 ports as required by your network For the AT CM70S Line Card intended for the remote site change its UART setting to UART local console mode after configuring its T1 E1 ports This will make it possible for you to adjust the settings of the T1 E1 ports from the Console port when the line card is installed at the remote site 193 Chapter 7 Configuring the T1 E1 Ports on the AT CM70S Media Converter Line Card 194 How to set the UART setting on the AT CM70S Line Card is explained in the following procedure The procedure requires the AT CV5M02 Management Card The UART setting cannot be set through the Console port on the card A Caution This procedure may be disruptive to network operations The AT CM706 Line Card resets and initializes its management software when the UART setting is cha
245. odule App Ver BootLdr 1 AT CV5M02 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 Area2a AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 ver ES P Figure 106 Line Card Module Software Image Version AT S73 Version Numbers Return to the Main Menu Select Module Status and Configuration In the Module Status and Configuration window verify that the operating mode of the line card is set to OAM visible mode OamVisib Line card operating modes Mod Name CardTypever 1 AT CV5M02 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v2 5 Area2a AT CM202 v2 6 Area2b AT CM202 v2 7 a121 AT CM202 v2 8 Reg12 AT CM202 v2 9 AT CM202 v2 10 AT CM202 v2 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 AT CV102 More return to Main Menu Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib Oamvisib LinkTest LinkTest LinkTest LinkTest LinkTest Module Status and Configuration Converteon FIBER PORT COPPER PORT IPC AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL 800 v300 100 o N v300 100 N 0 0 A M 100 N 0 o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N Vv30 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N v300 100 N 0 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N V300 100 N O 0 oo 100 N 0 o o N
246. olumn Description LOCAL MODULE Mod Name This column lists the chassis slot numbers and the names of the local AT CM Line Cards in the chassis that contains the management card For instructions on how to assign names to local line cards refer to Assigning Names to AT CM Line Cards on page 149 CardTypeVer This column displays the model names of the management cards and the line cards in the local chassis The model names of newer versions of the AT CM Line Cards have suffixes like v2 174 Table 20 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description ST This column displays the states of the remote peer management connections between the local and remote line cards The possible states are 3 The local line card has established a remote peer management connection with a remote line card 3 The local line card hasn t established a remote peer management connection with a remote line card OV This column indicates whether or not the local AT CM Line Cards are set to the OAM visible operating mode as required by remote peer management Possible values are oO Y The local line card is set to the OAM visible mode o N Thelocalline card is set to one of the other operating modes This column also displays the active or standby state of the management cards in the chassis The active or stan
247. ommunity String Set Community String Trap Community String Location Contact Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c SNMP v3 Files AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 public private public California USA Allied Telesis Figure 24 SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2c Tab To change the contact and location information click Edit to display a pop up window To enter the location of the chassis select Location and enter a new location of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once To enter the name phone number or other information that identifies the person responsible for managing the system select Contact and enter a value of up to 20 alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete the current location without entering a new location press the space bar once Click Update to close the popup window To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply 87 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Configuring the SNMP Community Strings 88 Menus Web Browser The procedures in this section are used to set the three SNMP community strings Get Set and Trap on th
248. on Protocols SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol SNMPv3 MIB Views AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The SNMPv3 protocol supports two authentication protocols HMAC MD5 96 MD5 and HMAC SHA 96 SHA Both MD5 and SHA use an algorithm to generate a message digest Each authentication protocol authenticates a user by checking the message digest In addition both protocols use keys to perform authentication The keys for both protocols are generated locally using the Engine ID a unique identifier that is assigned to the switch automatically and the user password You modify a key only by modifying the user password In addition you have the option of assigning no user authentication In this case no authentication is performed for this user You may want to make this configuration for someone with super user capabilities Note The keys generated by the MD5 and SHA protocols are specific to the SNMPv3 protocol They have no relation to the SSL and SSH keys for encryption After you have configured an authentication protocol you have the option of assigning a privacy protocol In SNMPv3 protocol terminology privacy is equivalent to encryption Currently the DES protocol is the only encryption protocol supported The DES privacy protocol requires the authentication protocol to be configured as either MD5 or SHA If you assign a DES privacy protocol to a user then you are also required to assign a privacy password I
249. onfiguration Configuration Slot Number 4 Module AT CM212B 1 Auto copy Auto copy Line Card Configuration Yes Figure 61 Auto copy Tab 5 Click Edit 6 In the pop up window select the new setting for the auto copy feature 7 Click Update 8 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Current Configuration tab and click Save Current Configuration AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Restoring the Default Settings Menus The procedures in this section are used to restore the default settings on the AT CM Line Cards A Caution These procedures are disruptive to network operations Some network traffic may be lost A line card whose current operating mode is not the OAM visible mode has to initialize its management software after restoring the default values Although the card immediately resumes forwarding network traffic it will be unresponsive to management commands for one minute during the initialization process These procedures are not supported on the AT CM70S Line Card or the AT CV Line Cards To return the parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards to the default settings from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to return to the default settings You can c
250. onfiguration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 From the Module Status and Configuration Menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to configure This displays the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 on page 140 You can configure only one card at a time Select Port A the fiber optic port on the line card The OAM client is supported only on Port A An example of the Port Management Menu is shown in Figure 54 on page 140 From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configurations menu in Figure 89 a OAM Configurations io Module 4 Port A OAM Configuration Show Local OAM Information Show Remote OAM Information Show OAM Statistics OAM Loopback Test Send OAM Variable Request ere to Port Management Menu E Figure 89 OAM Configurations Menu AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 5 From the OAM Configuration Menu select OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration submenu shown in Figure 90 d OAM Configuration TN Module 4 Port A Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Link Event Support NO variable Retrieval Support Yes eeu to OAM Configurations 2 Figure 90 OAM Configuration Submenu The parameters in the OAM Configuration submenu are defined in Table 25 Your changes are immediately implemented by the line card Table 25 O
251. onfigure only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed Select Line Card Configuration to display the Line Card Configuration Menu in Figure 62 d Line Card configuration BE Auto copy Line Card Configuration Display Current Configuration Display Last saved Configuration Display Default Configuration Restore Last Saved Configuration Return Line Card to Default Configuration Save Line Card Configuration M Return to Module Configuration Menu P Figure 62 Line Card Configuration Menu 153 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 154 4 To view the default settings of the line card prior to activating them select Display Default Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 63 7 Slot 11 Module AT CM202 Operational Mode OAM Visible Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Auto negotiate Duplex E em MDI MDIX oS Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit OAM Configuration Display Default Configuration E Port A 100BaseFX Port B 100Base TX Admin State Enabled Mode Passive Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support NO variable Retrieval Support Yes V ReEUEn to Line Card Configuration E 5 6 Figure 63 Display Default Configuration Window To
252. only The parameters for the fiber optic port and the twisted pair port are described in Table 16 on page 141 The OAM settings described in Table 25 on page 205 are only displayed for line cards set to the OAM visible mode or the OAM bypass mode Web Browser To view the current parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 In the Chassis View click either of the ports on the AT CM Line Card you want to view Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the model name of the line card You can view only one line card at a time 3 Select the Line Card Configuration tab 4 Select the Current Configuration tab shown in Figure 52 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Setting Line Card Configuration Current Last Saved Default Auto copy Configuration Configuration Configuration Slot Number 5 Module AT CM202 Operation Mode OAM Visible Save Current Configuration Current Configuration Port A 100Base FX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Enabled Negotiation Manual negotiate Duplex Half MDI MDIX Auto MDI MDIX Ingress Rate Limit 8 Mbps 8 Mbps Egress Rate Limit 8 Mbps 8 Mbps OAM Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 1518 Unidirectional Supprt Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support No Variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 52
253. ons Pi Figure 123 Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu To access the Configure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the Target Parameters Table tab The Target Address Table tab is shown in Figure 122 System Configuration SNMPvi amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Group Notify Table Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Tabl able Message Processing Model Security Model Security Name Security Level Storage Type Figure 124 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Tab The parameters are defined in Figure 33 on page 265 Table 34 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters Parameter Description Target Parameters Name A name for the entry of up to 32 alphanumeric characters User Security Name The user name of the appropriate entry in the SNMPv3 User Table 268 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 34 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Model 1 v1 2 v2c 3 v3 The Security Model for this Security Name or User Name The possible values are 1 v1 This value associates the Security Name or User Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c This value associates the Security Name or User Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 This value associates the Security Name or User Name with th
254. ormation window is shown in Figure 73 and Figure 74 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 2d SFP Information E Slot 4 Port A Type of Serial Transceiver 3 vendor Specific SONET Compliance Codes 22 Gigabit Ethernet Compliance Codes 2 Fiber channel Link Length 20 Fiber channel Transmitter Type 10 Fiber channel Media Type 1 Fiber Channel Speed 15 Encoding 5 Normal Baud Rate 19 2 5GHz 9micro Distance 14 50micro Distance 0 60micro Distance 0 CU Distance 0 Transmit Disable 1 Laser Fault 1 Signal Detect Logical 0 0 Signal Detect Logical 1 1 Upper Baud Rate Margin Cin 96 Lower Baud Rate Margin Cin 8 ee any key to continue E Figure 73 SFP Information Window 1 2 di SFP Information TN Slot 4 Port A Vendor name OUI LUMINENT Vendor IEEE Company ID 06b5 Vendor part number SFP 2500 SR1 vendor revision number 0000 vendor serial number 3696120986 vendor date code 030609 Vendor specific ID pHi any key to continue E Figure 74 SFP Information Window 2 2 171 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Web Browser _ To view SFP information from the web browser windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Select the Diagnostics tab 3 Select the SFP Information tab shown in Figure 75 Administration General Event Log Diagnostics Help inecard Line
255. ownload with TFTP Select Upload Configuration File from Management Card This prompt is displayed TFTP Server IP Address gt _ Enter the IP address of the TFTP server This prompt is displayed Configuration File Name gt _ Enter a filename for the configuration file The file will be given this name on the TFTP server The extension should be cfg This prompt is displayed 281 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files Ready to upload Configuration file through TFTP Warning During Upload Configuration Management activity is disabled Do TFTP upload now Yes or No 6 Type Y for to start the download This prompt is displayed Uploading Configuration file through TFTP please wait TFTP Upload Configuration file successfully The management card displays the Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP menu again when the upload is finished Web Browser To upload the master configuration file to a TFTP server from the web browser windows 1 Click Configuration from the menus bar 2 Click the Files tab The tab is shown in Figure 130 Configuration System SNMPv1 amp SNMPy2c SNMPv3 Files Configuration Save System Configuration Save All Cards Configurations Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations Return Configuration in Management Card to Default Apply Configuration File Upload TFTP Server IP Address Configuration File Name Configuratio
256. p to 1522 bytes This is not adjustable except on the AT CM2KOS Line Card which can handle packets up to 1632 bytes To adjust the maximum packet size on the AT CM2KOS Line Card perform the procedure in this section To adjust the maximum packet sizes on AT CM2KOS Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration The Module Status and Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 48 on page 128 Select the AT CM2K0S Line Card you want to configure This displays the Module Configuration Menu for the line card An example is shown in Figure 53 on page 139 From the Module Configuration Menu select Configure Max Frame Size to display the Max Frame Size Config Menu shown in Figure 59 a Max Frame Size Config Menu TX Module 14 gt Max Frame Size 1522 1518 Max Frame Size 1632 hos to Module Configuration Menu E Figure 59 Max Frame Size Config Menu From the Max Frame Size Config Menu select one of the following frame sizes 1522 1518 Allows frames up to 1522 bytes This is the default value 1632 Allows frames of up to 1632 bytes The line card immediately implements your change To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Module Configuration Menu and select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration This procedure is not supported in the web browser windows AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Setting t
257. perating mode of the line card in the OpMode column If the line card is not set to the OAM visible mode OamVisib you will have to set it to that mode For information about this menu refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 128 Line card operating modes a Module Status and Configuration N Converteon MODULE INF FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Mod_Name CardTypever ST OperMode IPC AC VER ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN 1 AT CV5M02 0 I 811 v300 100 2 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 3 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 4 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A i 100 Y 0 0 Y 5 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 6 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A i 100 Y 0 0 Y 7 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 8 AT CM202 v2 Ooamvisib o N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 9 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A 100 Y 0 0 Y 10 AT CM202 v2 Oamvisib oo N v300 100 N 0 0 A x 100 Y 0 0 Y 11 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 12 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 13 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 14 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N 100 15 AT CV102 LinkTest 100 N
258. perature Threshold event in the log with a classification of report After the temperature returned below the threshold the management card would log the same event message with a clear classification All of the messages can be reports but only a few can also be clear signals ModuleName This column displays the names of the line cards that generated the event messages Message This column displays the event messages The messages are described in Table 9 99 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 9 lists the event messages Table 9 Event Log Messages Message Chassis Classi fication Definition n Voltage Failed AT CV5000 Report Clear The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power Supply Module in the AT CV5000 Chassis had an output voltage failure The variable ncan be 3 3V 5V or 12V and signals which voltage failed The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power Supply Module resumed normal operations or was replaced Copper port failure on remote linecard n AT CV1200 AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report The twisted pair port on a remote AT CM Line Card lost its link to its network device This message requires remote peer management Clear The twisted pair port on a remote AT CM Line Card established a link to its network device This messages requires remote peer management CPM Card Reboot AT CV1200 AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report The AT CV5MO2
259. port As with the other operating modes this mode does not interfere with the flow of network traffic through the ports of a line card during normal network operations of a media converter line card However Allied Telesis recommends limiting its use to diagnosing link failures particularly if the network devices connected to the ports are managed devices The pulsing of the transmitter on a port and the constantly changing status of a link could prove problematic for some managed devices For example the device might send a constant stream of SNMP traps or if the device is OAM Visible Mode OAM Bypass Mode Setting the Operating Mode AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide running a spanning tree protocol the protocol might become confused as the status of the device s link to the media converter constantly changes OAM is a set of tools and utilities for remotely monitoring testing and troubleshooting a network It provides network operators the ability to monitor the condition of the network and determine the location of the failing links or fault conditions For background information refer to the IEEE 802 3ah standard AT CM Line Cards set to the OAM visible operating mode support OAM on port A the fiber optic port They can initiate and participate in the OAM discovery process by sending and processing OAM control packets referred to as OAMPDUS on the fiber optic ports Line cards set to this operating su
260. pport several additional features some of which are part of the IEEE 802 3ah standard for OAM while others are specific to the Converteon product line These features are 0 OAM loopback test to test the quality of the fiber optic cable that links two AT CM Line Cards o Dying gasp to notify you when a remote AT CV1203 Chassis loses power o Remote peer management for monitoring and configuring remote AT CM Line Cards through their local line card counterparts in a managed chassis o Downloads of new versions of the AT S73 Management Software to remote AT CM Line Cards D OAM variable retrievals to examine the values of MIB objects on OAM compliant devices For background information on these features refer to DAM based Features on page 46 Cards in this OAM operating mode ignore OAMPDUS and so do not support any of the OAM features Instead they forward OAMPDUS as normal network traffic There are two ways to set the operating modes on the AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards You can use the DIP switches on the line cards or you can use the AT CV5M02 Management Card If you use the management card the DIP switches are deactivated and reactivating them requires the management card For instructions on how to set the operating modes of the line cards refer to Setting the Operating Mode on page 145 45 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards OAM based Features 46 Remote Peer Manage
261. r 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Displaying the Parameter Settings on AT CM Line Cards 136 Menus To view the current parameter settings of the AT CM Line Cards from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration to display the Module Status and Configuration menu shown in Figure 48 on page 128 From the Module Status and Configuration menu select the AT CM Line Card you want to view You can view only one line card at a time The Module Configuration Menu in Figure 53 on page 139 is displayed Select Line Card Configuration to display the menu in Figure 62 on page 153 Select Display Current Configuration An example of the window is shown in Figure 51 ra OAM Return to Line Card Configuration Display Current Configuration NN Slot 11 Module AT CM202 v2 Operational Mode OAM Visible Port A 100BaseFX Port B 100Base TX Port Enable Enabled Disabled Negotiation e Manual negotiate Duplex XE Half MDI MDIX MDI Flow Control Enable Enable Ingress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Egress Rate Limit No Limit No Limit Configuration Admin State Enabled Mode Active Maximum OAMPDU Size 64 Unidirectional Support Yes Loopback Support Yes Event Support Yes variable Retrieval Support Yes Figure 51 Display Current Configuration Window AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide This window is for viewing purposes
262. r Line Cards Table 1 AT CM Media Converter Line Cards 38 Type of Maximum Line Card Port Slot Connector Cable Speed Distance AT CM70S srp Varies by SFP Varies by SFP 1 25 Gbps Varies by SFP transceiver transceiver transceiver Twisted pair RJ 45 Twisted pair 10 Mbps or 100 meters 100 Mbps 328 feet T1 E12 RJ 48 Twisted pair n a n a RS 232 Mini DIN RS 232 Serial n a n a Console 1 SFP transceiver sold separately 2 Four T1 E1 ports Note The maximum operating distances of the fiber optic ports assume full duplex operation The distances are significantly less for half duplex mode The fiber optic ports on most of the line cards are standard Ethernet ports that can be connected to other Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet devices that have compatible fiber optic ports including other media converters The operating specifications of the fiber optic ports can be found in the Installation Guides that ship with the line cards Two of the line cards however have to be used in pairs because their fiber optic ports function as multiplexers combining two or more data streams onto a single fiber strand to utilize more of the available bandwidth of the fiber optic cable One of the cards is the AT CM212 Line Card It has a simplex SC fiber optic port that combines both the send and receive data streams of the Ethernet traffic onto a single strand of single mode fiber cable As shown in Tab
263. r line card in slot n of the AT CV5000 Chassis received a clear signal from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV1203 Chassis indicating that power has been restored This message requires peer to peer management Dying Gasp has Occurred on Remote Line Card n AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report The media converter line card in slot n in the AT CV5000 Chassis received the dying gasp signal from its line card counterpart in a remote AT CV 1203 Chassis The remote line card sent the signal because the AT CV1203 Chassis lost power For further information refer to Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp on page 229 Fan Tray A B Fan Temperature Exceeds Limit AT CV1200 AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Report The temperature of the chassis exceeded the temperature threshold Clear The temperature of the chassis returned below the temperature threshold Fan Tray A B has been Installed AT CV5000 Report The AT CVFAN Fan Module was installed in the AT CV5000 Chassis 101 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 9 Event Log Messages Classi Message Chassis d Definition fication Fan Tray A B has AT CV5000 Report The AT CVFAN Fan Module was removed been Removed from the chassis Fan Tray Module A B AT CV1200 Report A cooling fan stopped Fan n Failed AT CV1203 AT CV5000 Clear A cooling fan resumed operations Line Ca
264. rd n Missing AT CV1200 Report The line card in slot n was removed from AT CV1203 the chassis AT CV one Clear The line card removed from slot n was reinstalled in the slot Line Card m Port n AT CV1200 Report Port n on the line card in slot m lost its link Offline AT CV1203 to a network device AT CV5000 Line Card m Port n AT CV1200 Report Port n on the line card in slot m Online AT CV1203 established a valid link with a network AT CV5000 device Line Card n Reboot AT CV1200 Report The line card in slot n was rebooted from AT CV1203 using the AT CV5M02 Management Card AT CV5000 Power Module A B AT CV5000 Report The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power has been Installed Supply Module was installed in the AT CV5000 Chassis Power Module A B AT CV5000 Report The AT PWR14 or AT PWR15 Power has been Removed Supply Module was removed from the AT CV5000 Chassis 102 4 To clear all the messages from the log select Clear Event Log from the Event Log Menu Web Browser To view the event log from the web browser windows AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 1 Select Administrator from the menu bar 2 Click the Event Log tab to display the Event Log tab shown in Figure 33 The messages are displayed from oldest to newest Refer to Table 8 on page 99 for the descriptions of the columns and Table 9 on page 100 for the event messages and their meanings Administration General Event Log Syslog
265. re programs on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards This field will be blank for AT CM Line Cards that have AT S73 Management Software earlier than Version 3 0 0 This field will also be blank for AT CV Line Cards because they do not have management software AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 13 Module Status and Configuration Menu Column Description FIBER PORT or COPPER PORT ST This column displays the states of the ports The possible states are o The port has establish a link to a network device o o The port has not establish a link to a network device SP This column displays the speeds of the ports The possible speeds are o 10 10 Mbps o 100 100 Mbps o 1G 1 Gbps FC This column displays the status of flow control on the ports of the AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Flow control is enabled on the port o N Flow control is disabled on the port IngRL This column displays the settings of the ingress rate limiting filters on the ports on the AT CM Line Cards The value 0 means rate limiting has not been set on the port This is the default setting For instructions on setting this parameter refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on AT CM Line Cards on page 139 This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards EgrRL This column displays the settings of the egress rate limiting filters on the ports on the AT CM
266. re useful when troubleshooting a link problem The Smart MissingLink mode is nearly identical to the MissingLink mode it too enables the two ports on a media converter line card to share the link status of their connections This mode is different in that it does not completely shut off the transmitter of a port on a line card when the companion port loses its link Rather this operating mode pulses the port s transmitter and flashes the port s Link LED once a second to signal that the port can still establish a link to its network device and that the loss of the link originated on the companion port on the line card The advantage of this operating mode over the MissingLink mode is that you can use the Link LEDs on a line card to troubleshoot a link failure with the ports As an example assume that the fiber optic port on a media converter line card operating in the Smart MissingLink operating mode lost its link to its network device The mode would respond by pulsing the transmitter on the twisted pair port and flashing the port s Link LED about once a second to signal that the failure originated on the fiber optic port When the connection is reestablished on the fiber optic port the twisted pair port would automatically resume normal operations to permit the two ports to forward traffic again The operating mode functions the same if the failure starts on the twisted pair port Here the mode pulses the transmitter on the fiber optic
267. ress Name Ip Address UDP Port Timeout 10ms Retries Tag List Target Parameters Storage Type SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu Target Parameters Name User Security Name Security Model Security Level Storage Type 295 Appendix B SNMPv3 Configuration Examples 296 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2K0S Line Card Because of the component design on the AT CM2KOS Line Card the actual performance of packet rate limiting on the two ports may not correspond with the value you specify The graph in Figure 131 shows the correlation between the permitted ingress and egress rate limit values and the actual average rate limits For example the actual packet rate limit for any value between 150 000 and 250 000 is 285 714 packets To set packet rate limiting refer to Configuring the Port Parameters on AT CM Line Cards on page 139 Average Rate Limit Result Kbps 300000 250000 200000 150000 100000 50000 i 0 50000 100000 150000 200000 250000 300000 Value You Specified Kbps Figure 131 Rate Limit Input vs Hardware Configured Values Table 37 lists the values in table format When you see multiple values in the Specified Rate Limit Kbps column and Same in the Average Rate Limit Kbps column the average rate limit val
268. ric characters IP Address TAddress The IP address of the host The IP address is entered in this format XXX XXX XXX XXX UDP Port The UDP port The range is 0 to 65 535 The default port is 162 Timeout 10mS The timeout value in milliseconds When an Inform message is generated a response from the device is required The timeout value determines how long SNMPv3 considers the Inform message as an active message This parameter applies to Inform messages only The range is from 0 to 2 147 483 647 milliseconds The default value is 1500 milliseconds 265 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 33 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Parameters Parameter Description Retries Tag List Target Parameters The number of times the switch retrles or resends an Inform message When an Inform message is generated a response from the switch is required This parameter determines how many times the switch resends an Inform message The Retries parameter applies to Inform messages only The range is 0 to 255 retries The default is 3 retries The tag or list of tags defined by the Notify Tag parameter in the corresponding entry in the SNMPv3 Notify Table The tag list can be up to 256 alphanumeric characters Separate entries with a space for example hwengtag swengtag testengtag The corresponding Target Parameters name This value has to match the name of the corresponding entry in the SNMPv3 Targe
269. ritative entity checks the authenticity of the non authoritative entity And the non authoritative entity checks the authenticity of the authoritative entity With the SNMPv3 protocol you create users determine the protocol used for message authentication as well as determine if data transmitted between two SNMP entities is encrypted In addition you can restrict user privileges by determining the user s view of the Management Information Bases MIB In this way you restrict which MIBs the user can display and modify In addition you can restrict the types of messages or traps the user can send A trap is a type of SNMP message After you have created a user you define SNMPv3 message notification This consists of determining where messages are sent and what types of messages can be sent This configuration is similar to the SNMPv1 and SNMP v2c configuration because you configure IP addresses of trap receivers or hosts In addition with the SNMPv3 implementation you decide what types of messages are sent This section further describes the features of the SNMPv3 protocol The following subsections are included SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols on page 239 SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol on page 239 SNMPv3 MIB Views on page 239 SNMPv3 Storage Types on page 241 SNMPv3 Message Notification on page 241 SNMPv3 Tables on page 242 SNMPv3 Configuration Example on page 246 o2 uuuuiuouiu SNMPv3 Authenticati
270. rter Line Card Series and the AT S73 Management Software o AT CV Media Converter Line Card Series DO AT CV5M01 Management Card and the AT S70 Management Software DO AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT S99 Management Software CD AT CV1000 AT CV1200 AT CV1203 and AT CV5000 Chassis Most of the line cards in the AT CM Series and the AT CV Series are two port media converters that transfer Ethernet network traffic between a twisted pair port and a fiber optic port or two fiber optic ports Most of the line cards have fiber optic ports that have fixed operating distances However several of the cards can be customized for specific transmission media or distance requirements because they feature one or two slots for SFP fiber optic transceivers The AT CM and AT CV Line Cards can be used as unmanaged devices They are fully operational as soon as they are installed in a Converteon chassis and cabled to your network They feature low latency to minimize the impact on network performance and cyclic redundancy check CRC detection to prevent the propagation of incomplete or fragmented packets on your network For network environments where management oversight is necessary the Converteon product line includes the AT CV5MO1 and AT CV5M02 Management Cards These cards let you view the status of the links of the ports on the media converter line cards display port statistics and configure the operating modes of the line cards These cards
271. rts configuring from Console port 199 configuring with AT CV5M02 Management Card 196 default settings 289 selecting management method 192 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Telnet management described 25 enabling or disabling 90 requirements 28 starting 61 temperature threshold 115 TFTP client configuring 273 downloading management software 275 downloading master configuration files 284 requirements 28 uploading master configuration files 281 U unidirectional support 206 Ww web browser management described 25 requirements 28 starting 62 X XMODEM downloading management software 279 319 Index 320
272. s 36 The AT CM Line Cards are two port Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet media converters that transfer network traffic between twisted pair cable and fiber optic cable Most of the line cards have fiber optic ports with fixed operating distances However two of the cards can be customized for specific distances because they have slots for SFP transceivers These line cards can be used as unmanaged devices They have DIP switches for setting the operating modes and LEDs on the front panels for viewing port and card status information The AT CM Line Cards support the five operating modes listed here For background information refer to Operating Modes on page 42 Link Test MissingLink Smart MissingLink OAM bypass OAM visible u uuu iau The AT CM Line Cards have these additional features when used together with the AT CV5M02 Management Card C You can set packet rate limits on the ports of the cards to regulate the amount of forwarded traffic You might use this feature to prevent traffic bottlenecks on your network O You can configure the parameter settings on the twisted pair ports by disabling Auto Negotiation and setting the speed and duplex mode manually You can enable and disable ports on the line cards to secure them from unauthorized access when the cards are not in use or to isolate portions of a network O You can implement the OAM based features such as remote peer management and loopback tests
273. s return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System Confirmation or Save System and All Line Card Confirmations Resetting the management card ends your management session To continue managing the chassis wait approximately one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and afterwards start a new management session If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards resetting the active card activates the standby management card To resume managing the chassis wait 20 seconds for the standby card to transition to the active state and then start a new management session For more information refer to Redundant Management Cards on page 26 To reset the management card from the menus interface 1 2 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration Select the management card to display the Module Configuration Menu Select Reset Management Card and Restart System Software At the confirmation prompt select Yes to reset the card or No to cancel the procedure To resume managing the chassis wait about one minute for the management card to initialize its management software and then start a new management session Web Browser AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To reset the management card from the web browser windows 1 2 3 Select Module Status and Configuration from the menu bar From the Chassis View click the 10 100Base TX port on the
274. sis View click Port A the fiber optic port on the AT CM Line Card whose remote counterpart you want to query with an OAM variable request Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it 4 Click the OAM Variable Request tab to display the window in Figure 104 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View Operation Mode Line Card Configuration Port Port Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Status Configuration Statistics Configuration Information Statistics Loopback Test Request Slot Number 11 Module AT CM202 OAM Variable Request Branch Number 0 255 Leaf Number 0 255 226 Figure 104 OAM Variable Request Tab AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Click Edit to display the OAM Variable Request pop up window Select the Branch Number field and enter the branch number of the MIB package or object to be returned The range is 0 to 255 Select the Leaf Number field and enter the leaf number of the package or object to be returned The range is O to 255 Click Send If the remote OAM device has a value for the corresponding MIB object the value is displayed on the screen 227 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 228 Chapter 9 Configuring AT CM Line Cards for Dying Gasp The sections in this chapter are D
275. splay the SNMPv3 User Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 250 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table This section describes the parameters for SNMPv3 View Table entries The parameters are View Name Subtree OID Subtree Mask o o o o MIB OID Table View To access the SNMPv3 View Table from the menus O From the Main Menu select Configuration gt System Configuration gt SNMPv3 Configurations gt Configure SNMPv3 View Table The Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu is shown in Figure 113 a Configure SNMPv3 View Table B Converteon Create SNMPv3 Table Entry Delete SNMPv3 Table Entry Modify SNMPv3 Table Entry Display SNMPv3 Table Entry eran to SNMPv3 Configurations E Figure 113 Configure SNMPv3 View Table Menu To manage the SNMPv3 View Table from the web browser windows O Click the Configuration button in the menu bar and then select the SNMPv3 tab and the View Table tab The SNMPv3 View Table tab is shown in Figure 114 251 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 General SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table View Name Subtree OID Subtree Mask View Type Storage Type viewCommpublic fil FF Included Permanent g ig viewUSMmanager dl FF Included Permanent g ig viewCommprivate d FF Included Permanent g is Fi
276. st frames bytes and bits as it transmitted Test frames are sixty octets in length You can stop the test at any time by selecting Stop Loopback Test from the OAM Loopback Test Menu To resume normal network operations of the line card select Disable Remote Loopback To clear the statistics counters select Clear Loopback Test Statistics 211 Chapter 8 Configuring the Operations Administration and Maintenance Client 212 Web Browser To run the loopback test from the web browser windows A Caution This test is disruptive to network operations Some network traffic may be lost The local and remote media converter line cards do not forward network traffic during the test 1 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 2 From the Chassis View click Port A the fiber optic on the AT CM Line Card you want to perform the loopback test Alternatively select the Menu View and click the model name of the AT CM Line Card 3 If the Port A tab is not selected select it The OAM client is only supported on Port A 4 Click the OAM Loopback Test tab to display the OAM Loopback Test tab in Figure 94 Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu Port Port Status Configuration Slot Number 11 OAM Loopback Test Remote Loopback OAM Loopback Test Operation Mode Line Card Configuration Port OAM OAM OAM OAM OAM Variable Statistics Configuration Information
277. supported on port A of the line cards From the Port Management Menu select OAM Configurations to display the OAM Configuration Menu An example of the menu is shown in Figure 89 on page 204 From the OAM Configuration Menu select the Show Local OAM Information window to display the Show Local OAM Information Menu shown in Figure 96 on page 215 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide a Show Local OAM Information TN Module 4 Port A Line Card Operation Mode OAM Visible Mode Operation Status Operational Mux State Forward Parser State Forward Local Discovering Yes Local Stable NO Remote Discovering NO Remote Stable NO Critical Event NO Dying Gasp NO Link Fault NO OAM Version 0x01 Config Revision 0x0003 vendor Information 0x00160001 Vendor OUI 00 30 84 Loopback State None In Loopback Test No V Return to OAM Configurations ff Figure 96 Show Local OAM Information Window This window is for viewing purposes only The items in the window are defined in Table 26 Table 26 Show Local OAM Information Window Column Description Line Card Displays the OAM operating mode of the line card The Operation possible values are Mode C OAM Bypass Mode In this mode the line card does not process any OAMPDU packets it receives Rather it handles them like normal network traffic forwarding them onto the other port This allows the line card to be used in a network where the Conv
278. sword 69 90 described 24 P passwords setting 69 90 pinging network devices performing 125 requirements 28 ports configuring 139 R redundant management cards activating 117 described 26 master configuration files 32 status messages 27 remote management software updates configuring AT CM Line Cards for 74 described 50 remote peer management configuring AT CM Line Cards for 74 described 46 using menus 174 using web browser windows 182 remote peer management updates with TFTP 275 with XMODEM 279 resetting AT CM Line Cards 162 AT CV5M02 Management Card 96 S serial numbers 167 SFP information 170 Smart MissingLink operating mode described 44 selecting 145 SNMP community strings configuring 70 88 default settings 287 SNMP management described 25 requirements 28 SNMP traps adding IP addresses of receivers 89 requirements 28 SNMPv3 described 238 examples 291 SNMPv3 Access Table configuring 254 described 244 SNMPv3 Group Table configuring 258 described 245 SNMPv3 Notify Table configuring 261 described 245 SNMPv3 Target Address Table configuring 264 described 245 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table configuring 267 described 245 SNMPv3 User Table configuring 248 described 244 SNMPv3 View Table configuring 251 described 244 standby management card activating 117 standby management cards described 26 statistics 160 syslog client configuring 105 described 23 requirements 28 T T1 E1 po
279. t lt Channel gt to change each channel s config Change will be saved automatically if EEPROM data was used Figure 88 Local Console Menu on the AT CM70S Line Card The first selection in the menu lt a gt Boot Data From returns the parameter settings of the T1 E1 ports to the default values This selection initially says Manufacture Default which indicates that the parameter settings on the ports are at their default values As you configure the ports it automatically changes to Customized in EEPROM If at a later time you want to discard all of your changes and return the ports to the default values type a lowercase and respond to the confirmation prompt The second selection b LIU Mode toggles the line card between T1 or E1 support as explained in step 4 The main part of the menu is a table with the current settings of the T1 E1 ports channels To change a setting of a port refer to step 5 4 To toggle the line card between T1 or E1 support Note Changing the T1 E1 mode of the line card returns the port settings to the default values Any changes to the port settings are discarded a Type b lowercase to select LIU Mode and press Return AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide b At the confirmation prompt type Y and press Return to implement the change or N and Return to cancel it 5 To configure the settings of a T1 E1 port enter the number of the setting you want to change
280. t software You can use XMODEM or TFTP to download new management software Downloads using XMODEM have to be performed from a local management session at the chassis Downloads using TFTP can be performed from local management sessions or remote Telnet or web browser management sessions 272 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the TFTP Client The procedure in this section explains how to configure the TFTP client This is the first step to using TFTP to download new versions of the management software programs to the AT CV5M02 Management Card or the AT CM Line Cards This procedure has to be performed from the menus After you ve configured the client go to Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP on page 275 To configure the TFTP client 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration to display the Configuration Menu shown in Figure 20 on page 80 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 From the System Configuration Menu select TFTP Image Download Configuration to display the menu in Figure 125 E TFTP Image Download Configuration UN TFTP Server IP Address Management Card AT CM2x2 Image File Name AT CM2Kx Image File Name AT CM7Ox Image File Name Line Card Bootloader Image File Name feta to System Configuration Menu J Figure 125 TFTP Image Download Configuration To enter or edit the
281. t Method for the T1 E1 Ports on page 192 di LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu N Module 15 Port C gt Manufacture T1 Mode Manufacture E1 Mode Customized Mode Channel 1 Sub Menu 1 Channel 1 Sub Menu 2 Channel 2 Sub Menu 1 Channel 2 Sub Menu 2 Channel 3 Sub Menu 1 Channel 3 Sub Menu 2 Channel 4 Sub Menu 1 Channel 4 Sub Menu 2 Return to Port Configuration Menu E Figure 85 LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu 5 To designate the T1 or E1 carrier type for the line card select Manufacture T1 Mode or Manufacture E1 Mode respectively 196 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 6 After you ve designated the carrier type configure the individual ports Each channel in the menu represents a different port on the line card Channel 1 represents T1 E1 port 1 channel 2 represents T1 E1 port 2 and so forth Each port has a submenu 1 shown in Figure 86 and a submenu 2 shown in Figure 87 Some of the selections differ depending on the designated carrier type of the card di TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 E Module 15 Port C gt Long Haul Limited Long Haul gt T1 DSX 1 0 to 133ft 0dB CSU T1 DSX 1 133 to 266ft T1 DSX 1 266 to 399ft T1 DSX 1 399 to 533ft T1 DSX 1 533 to 655ft T1 7 5dB CSU T1 15dB CSU T1 22 5dB CSU Return to LIU Mode and Channel Select Menu E Figure 86 TDM Channel Configuration Menu 1 ie TDM Channel Configuration Menu 2 78
282. t Parameters Table Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 266 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table This section describes the parameters for entries in the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table which links the user security information with the message notification information in the SNMPv3 Notify Table and the SNMPv3 Target Address Table In the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table you specify the SNMP parameters that are used when a message is generated to a target or host IP address The SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table also links a User Name and its related security information called user security information with a host The user security information consists of the following parameters listed in the SNMPv3 tables where they are configured o User Name parameter configured in the SNMPv3 User Table menu D View Name parameter configured in the SNMPv3 View Table menu O Group Name Security Model and Security
283. t card enters 1 e the eventin the eventlog and sends an SNMP trap Figure 8 1st Failure Signal Note All of the AT CM Line Cards support the 1st failure signal except for the double slot AT CM70S Line Card Since that line card occupies both slots in the AT CV1203 Chassis there isn t an available slot in the chassis for a management card The requirements of the dying gasp feature are O Only AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV1203 Chassis can send the signal and only AT CM Line Cards in the AT CV5000 Chassis can recognize the signal and pass it to the management card in the chassis This feature is not supported on the AT CV Line Cards the AT CV 1000 Chassis or the AT CV1200 Chassis 0 This feature requires the newest versions of the AT CM Line Cards listed in Table 3 You have to use a management card to determine the version levels of the line cards because the version levels are not included on the faceplates on the cards When viewed with the management software the model names of the new line cards include extensions that contain the version levels like AT CM201 v2 53 Chapter 2 AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Table 3 Versions of the AT CM Line Cards that Support Dying Gasp Media Converter Line Card Hardware Version AT CM201 Version 2 AT CM202 Vers
284. t expect hosts to respond to traps I Inform This option sends inform messages SNMPv3 expects hosts to respond to inform messages Storage Type The possible values are V Volatile This selection blocks the management card from saving the entry in the master configuration file 262 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 32 SNMPv3 Notify Table Parameters Parameter Description Storage Type Continued N NonVolatile This selection allows the management card to save the entry in the master configuration file when a save command is issued Allied Telesis recommends this storage type Row Status This parameter appears only when you display the SNMPv3 Notify Table The Active value indicates the entry takes effect immediately 263 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The SNMPv3 Target Address Table is used to designate the IP addresses of hosts to receive notifications The SNMPv3 Target Address Table is linked internally to the SNMPv3 Notify Table through the Tag List parameter The entries in the SNMPv3 Notify Table receive the host IP addresses from the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table The parameters of the entries in the SNMPv3 Target Address Table are Target Address Name Target IP Address UDP Port Timeout Value Number of Retries Tag List Target Parameters uuuuuuiuiu Storage Type The p
285. t the standby card isn t properly updating its master configuration file However a standby management card that is not updating its configuration file might be faulty and should probably be replaced For more information refer to Redundant Management Cards on page 26 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide What to Configure First on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Changing the Manager and Operator Passwords This section has a few suggestions on what to configure on the management card during the initial management session The first management session has to be a local session from the Console port on the card For instructions on how to start a local management session refer to Starting a Local Management Session on page 58 Since the default passwords for the manager and operator accounts on the management card are included in this guide you should change them to protect the unit from unauthorized access To change the passwords 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select Omega Options to display the Omega Options Menu 4 On the Omega Options Menu select Manager Password to change the Manager password or Operator Password to change the Operator password 5 Enter anew password of 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters A password is case sensitive and can have the letters A to Z in uppercase and lower
286. tae aeie aeai etante 235 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPV3 ooo cece cence ene eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseaaaeesaeeeesaeeeeeaaeeeseeeessaeeeeneaeeesneaeensaneeesgs 237 SNMP V OEO E E 238 SNMPv3 Authentication Protocols esssssesseeeeeeenee nennen enenrnen nene enne enin nene enn entren 239 SNMPy3 Privacy Protocol f ete e e p ea ec d eie e ce E PH enge 239 SNMPV3 MIB VIGWS 5t dtt eei e eddie mediis 239 SINT A Eier Mm 241 SNMPv3 Message Notification 2 incer ien tienne tinte eese Ieri ee dede iden ee dnte ee E a EEE deve Pede ede denne 241 SNMPYyS Tables 5 3 e D etd ito e e eta ite iiber qa dete dd iler eios 242 SNMPv3 Configuration Exambple 1 cepe et erp tee eie de RT e tle e FE eve dee ve Ute e ete dee Tee gite pe nage descen 246 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring SNMBYV3 Entities tei ee eaa tee teer ta adea ad a Urea aaeain eiaa 247 Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table nennen nennen nreen nnn en nene entren nennen nensem nre nnne nn 248 Configuring the SNMPv3 View Table ssssseeeseeneenn eene nennen nnne enn rentre enne enn en eri enn enn nnen nnne 251 Configuring the SNMPv3 Access able ssrin nsien ette dueeneseshtenssocedensceceedsenevecnsueseebdsusieebecdaneneneeseneede 254 Configuring the SNMPv3 Gro
287. tallation of the line cards to verify whether or not the ports on the cards have established links to their network devices MissingLink Mode AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The two ports of a media converter line card operating in this mode share their link status with each other so that both ports on a line card and consequently the network devices connected to the ports are always aware of a change to the status of the link of one of the ports on the card When a line card in the MissingLink mode detects the loss of a link on one of its ports it replicates the loss on the other port by disabling the port s transmitter This notifies the network device connected to the port of the loss of the link on the other port on the line card Without the MissingLink mode a network device connected to a port on a card would be unaware of a loss of a link on the companion port because its link to the media converter line card would be unaffected To explain it another way the MissingLink mode will not allow a port to form a link with its network device unless the companion port on the same line card can also establish a link with its device When the link is reestablished on a port the MissingLink mode automatically reactivates the transmitter on the companion port so that the two network devices can again forward traffic to each other through the two ports of the media converter line card The value to this type of f
288. tatistics Tx OAMPDUs 2968 Rx OAMPDUs 396 Tx Information OAMPDUS 2967 Rx Information OAMPDUS 396 Tx Event OAMPDUs Rx Unique Event OAMPDUs Rx Duplicated Event OAMPDUs Tx Loopback Control OAMPDUs Rx Loopback Control OAMPDUs Tx Variable Request OAMPDUs Rx Variable Request OAMPDUs Tx Variable Response OAMPDUs Rx Variable Response OAMPDUs Tx Organizational Specific OAMPDUs Rx Organizational Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported OAMPDUs O O O O O O O O OOOO Figure 101 OAM Statistics Tab Refer to the IEEE 802 3ah standard for definitions of the different types of OAMPDUs 224 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Viewing MIB Variables with OAM Variable Requests Menus These procedures are used to send OAM variable requests from the fiber optic ports on local AT CM Line Cards to remote OAM compatible devices OAM variable requests are used to view the values of MIB objects on remote devices For background information refer to OAM Variable Requests on page 55 Note These procedures require that the local and remote AT CM Line Cards be set to the OAM visible mode Note The AT CM Line Cards do not support any of the MIB objects in the portion of the MIB tree that variable requests can access So although the line cards can be used to send variable requests to query other OAM compatible devices for MIB values they do not respond to variable requests To send MIB variable requests
289. te information You can request technical support online from the Allied Telesis Knowledge Base at www alliedtelesis com support kb aspx You can submit questions to our technical support staff from the Knowledge Base and review answers to previously asked questions For Technical Support via email or telephone refer to the Allied Telesis web site at www alliedtelesis com Select your country from the list on the web site and then select the appropriate tab Products for return or repair must have Return Materials Authorization RMA numbers A product sent to Allied Telesis without an RMA number will be returned to the sender at the sender s expense To obtain an RMA number contact the Allied Telesis Technical Support group at www alliedtelesis com support rma as px You can contact Allied Telesis for sales or corporate information at our web site at www alliedtelesis com The Converteon products listed here have a Lifetime Warranty Two Years Fan and PSU AT CM Media Converter Line Cards AT CV Media Converter Line Cards AT CV1000 One slot Chassis AT CV1200 Two slot Chassis AT CV1203 Two slot Chassis u uuu iu These Converteon products have a Five Year Warranty o AT CV5MO1 Management Card o AT CV5M02 Management Card This Converteon product has a Lifetime Warranty Five Years Fan and PSU CO AT CV5000 Eighteen slot Chassis Preface Management Software Updates Go to www alliedtelesis com warranty for t
290. te line card select Remote Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar 4 You can either select another remote line card to configure or continue managing the local chassis Displaying the To view the current parameter settings of a remote card Current N 1 Click the Line Card Configuration tab Configuration 2 Click the Current Configuration tab An example of the window is shown in Figure 52 on page 137 The port parameters are described in Table 16 on page 141 and the OAM parameters in Table 25 on page 205 Configuring To configure the parameter settings of a remote port Remote Ports 1 From the Remote Module Status amp Configuration window adjust the twisted pair port You can configure only one port at a time 2 Click the Port Configuration tab 3 Configure the parameters as necessary The parameters are described in Table 16 on page 141 184 Restoring the Default Parameter Settings Restoring the Last Saved Configuration AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To restore a remote line card to its default parameter settings Caution This procedure may disrupt network operations Some network traffic may be lost Note A remote line card that is returned to its default values continues to support remote peer management because the default operating mode for the AT CM Line Cards is OAM visible 1 From the Remote Module Status amp Configuration window select the
291. te with its remote counterpart This column does not apply to the AT CV5M02 Management Card or the AT CV Line Cards AN This column displays the status of Auto Negotiation on the twisted pair ports on the AT CM Line Cards The possible states are o Y Auto Negotiation is enabled on the port The speed and duplex mode are set automatically This is the default setting o N Auto Negotiation is disabled on the port The speed and duplex mode were set manually 132 Web Browser AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide To view the states of the ports on the line cards from the web browser windows click Module Status amp Configuration in the menu bar The web browser windows have a Chassis View and a Menu View The Chassis View is an illustration of the front panel of the chassis The information is static To refresh the view simply click Module Status amp Configuration again To view or configure the parameters of the AT CM Line Cards or the AT CV5M02 Management Card click a port on a card You can configure only one card at a time ATZ Alied Telesis T S99 Converteon Web Management Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View g8 606 6 s0 6 s0 6 760 s0 6 Administration Image Download Configuration Management Card Redundancy Log Out Module Status amp Configuration AT C SMO2 n tM202 P M202 2 M202 P M
292. ter cards The events are composed of descriptions of the events and the dates and times of when they occurred If your network encounters a problem you may be able to more readily identify its cause by reviewing the history of the events in the log For more information refer to Viewing the Event Log on page 98 Syslog Client The activity monitor displays the same event messages stored in the event log but in real time When you open the activity monitor you can watch for the event messages as they occur For more information refer to Viewing the Activity Monitor on page 104 The management card has a syslog client for sending event messages to a syslog server on your network For instructions refer to Configuring the Syslog Client on page 105 23 Chapter 1 AT CV5M02 Management Card Network Time Protocol Client The management card has a Network Time Protocol NTP client for setting its date and time from an NTP server on your network or the Internet The card adds the date and time to the event messages stored in the event log and to the SNMP traps sent to SNMP trap receivers Although the date and time can be set manually the NTP client is the recommended method for setting this information because the card cannot maintain the date and time when it is reset or when the chassis is powered off For instructions refer to Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client on page 95 Manager and Operator Accounts
293. ter the date in the format mm dd yyyy format For example here is April 5 2008 04 05 2008 Select System Time and enter the time in 24 hour hh mm ss format For example 8 15 am would be 8 15 00 Click Update AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the Network Time Protocol Client Menus Web Browser The AT CV5MO2 Management Card has an NTP client for setting the date and time from a Network Time Protocol NTP server on your network or the Internet The card adds the date and time to event messages and SNMP traps Refer to Access to Your Network on page 28 for the NTP client requirements To configure the NTP client from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration menu is shown in Figure 20 on page 80 2 From the Configuration menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select System Clock Configuration to display the menu in Figure 26 on page 93 4 Select the NTP Server field and enter the IP address of the NTP server 5 To enable the client select Enable NTP 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration Menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To configure the NTP client from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 Ifthe System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 3 i
294. terparts It also displays the states of the fiber optic ports and twisted pair ports on the remote line cards The columns are described in Table 20 This menu does not display any information for AT CV Line Cards JA Remote Module Status and Configuration oN Converteon LOCAL MODULE REMOTE MODULE FIBER PORT COPPER PORT Mod Name CardTypever ST OV IPC VER Mod Name CardTypeVer VER OV SP FC IngRL EgrRL OAM ST SP FC IngRL EgrRL AN 1 AT CV5M02 d 2 Regll AT CM202 v2 Regll r AT CM202 v2 v300 y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y O 0 Y 3 Reg20 AT CM202 v2 Reg20 r X AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y O 0 Y 4 Reg21 AT CM202 v2 Reg2l r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y O 0 Y 5 Area2a AT CM202 v2 Area2a AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100v O0 0 Y 6 Area2b AT CM202 v2 area2b AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100v O0 0 Y 7 Regl2 AT CM202 v2 Regl2 r AT CM202 v2 v300 Y 100v 0 0 o 100 Y O 0 Y 8 AT CV102 2 2 9 AT CV102 2 2 c 10 AT CV102 0 2 c 11 AT CV102 0 02 c AT CV102 e c dee Us 7 slog rede se f Figure 76 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu Table 20 Remote Module Status and Configuration Menu C
295. the configuration files in flash memory on the cards The files contain the operating modes the port settings the ingress and egress filters and the OAM client settings of the line cards The cards automatically update their configuration files when you change a parameter setting There is no command that you have to perform For example if you adjust the OAM settings on a line card the card automatically updates its configuration file so that it retains the new settings even if you immediately afterwards remove the card and install it in another slot or chassis The configuration files on the AT CV Line Cards operate the same as the files on the AT CM Line Cards The AT CV Line Cards however have only one adjustable parameter the operating mode So their configuration files contain just that one parameter These configuration files are also automatically updated when you change the operating modes of these line cards through a management card The AT CV5M02 Management Card has two master configuration files These files contain the settings of the management card and all of the line cards in the chassis The management card stores one of the master configuration files in DRAM and automatically updates it by constantly polling the line cards over the backplane in the chassis for their current parameter settings This file is temporary because it is discarded whenever the chassis is powered off or the management card is reset or removed fro
296. the Group Table tab The tab is shown in Figure 118 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide System Configuration General SNMPv1 amp SNMPv2 SNMPv3 Help User View Access Group Notify Target Address Target Parameters Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Security Name Security Model Group Name Storage Type commpublic vi grpcommpublic Permanent 9 ig commprivate vi grpcommprivate Permanent A ig commopublic v2c grpcommpublic Permanent A ig commprivate vac grpcommprivate Permanent g ig manager usm grpmanager Permanent Y ig Figure 118 SNMPv3 Group Table Tab The parameters for SNMPv3 Group Table entries are defined in Table 31 Table 31 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters Parameter Description Security Name The Security Name that you want to associate with a group Enter a Security Name that you configured in Configuring the SNMPv3 User Table on page 248 Security Model The corresponding SNMP protocol of the User Name The possible values are 1 v1 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv1 protocol 2 v2c Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv2c protocol 3 v3 Select this value to associate the Group Name with the SNMPv3 protocol 259 Chapter 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Table 31 SNMPv3 Group Table Parameters Parameter Description Group Name a Group Name that you configured in the SNMPv3 Access Table Refer t
297. the Module Configuration Menu select Module Name and enter the new name for the card The name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are not allowed To save your changes in the master configuration file select Line Card Configuration and Save Line Card Configuration Or return to the Main Menu and select Configuration and Save System and All Line Card Configurations To assign names to the AT CM Line Cards from the web browser windows 1 2 Select Module Status amp Configuration from the menu bar In the Chassis View click a port on the line card you want to assign a name Alternatively select the Menu View tab and click the name of the line card You can configure only one line card at a time Click the Setting tab shown in Figure 58 Click Edit in the Module Name section of the window In the Module Name pop up window enter the new name for the card The name can be up to eight alphanumeric characters Spaces and special characters are not allowed Click Update To save your changes in the master configuration file select Configuration from the menu bar From the Configuration window click the Files tab Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply 149 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on AT CM2KOS Line Cards 150 Menus Web Browser The AT CM Line Cards can handle packets u
298. the RFC 3164 standard Click Update To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Configuring the 10 100Base TX Port Menus The procedures in this section explain how to set the speed and duplex mode on the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card The management card uses this port to accomplish those management functions that require communications with your network such as sending event messages to a syslog server or uploading or downloading files to a TFTP server For background information refer to 10 100Base TX Port on page 22 Note The port cannot be disabled Additionally the port s wiring configuration is preset to MDI and cannot be changed To configure the settings of the 10 100Base TX port on the management card from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Module Status and Configuration 2 Select the management card from the menu to display the Module Configuration Menu shown in Figure 34 2 Module Configuration Menu E Module 1 Module AT CV5M02 Port Link Speed Mode A 100BaseTx online 100M Full Module name Reset CPM and Restart System Software Return Management Card Port Configuration to Default Return to Module Status and Configuration Menu x Figure 34 Module Confi
299. this way you can more easily keep track of your users as belonging to one or two groups For each group you can assign read write and notify views of the MIB table The views you assign here have been previously defined in the Configure SNMPv3 View Table menu For example the Read View allows AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide group members to view the specified portion of the OID MIB table The Write View allows group members to write to or modify the MIBs in the specified MIB view The Notify View allows group members to send trap messages defined by the MIB view Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save this view to flash memory SNMPv3 Group Table The Configure SNMPv3 Group Table menu allows you to associate a User Name with a security group called a Group Name The User Name is previously configured with the Configure SNMPv3 User Table menu The security group is previously configured with the Configure SNMPv3 Access Table menu Lastly you can configure a storage type for this table entry which allows you to save the entry to flash memory SNMPv3 Notify Table The Configure SNMPv3 Notify Table menu allows you to define the type of message that is sent from the switch to the SNMP host In addition you have the option of defining the message type as either an Inform or a Trap message The difference between these two types of messages is that when a switch sends an I
300. ting parameters The setting for the auto copy parameter is stored in the master configuration file on the management card It is not stored in the configuration files on the line cards Consequently line cards do not carry this setting with them when they are moved to different slots or chassis The discussions so far have concerned configuration files on local AT CM Line Cards that reside in the same chassis as the management card Most of this information however also applies to remote AT CM Line Cards that are managed through the remote peer management feature As explained in Remote Peer Management on page 46 this feature lets you manage remote line cards through their local AT CM Line Card counterparts When a local line has a remote peer connection to a remote line card the AT CV5M02 Management Card stores the remote card s configuration in its master configuration file You can restore a configuration back to a remote line card just as you can to a local line card For instance if you install a new line card in a remote chassis you can download the last saved configuration to the card from the management card to give the new card the same configuration as the previous card in the remote chassis Here are two items of importance to restoring configurations to remote AT CM Line Cards O There is no auto copy for remote line cards To restore a previous configuration to a remote line card you have to do it manually The 31 C
301. tion Menu Figure 43 Terminal Configuration Menu 119 Chapter 4 Configuring the AT CV5M02 Management Card 120 Web Browser 4 Select Data rate baud rate to display the Terminal Data Rate Menu shown in Figure 44 T Terminal Data Rate Menu ES Converteon 115200 bps 57600 bps 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps un Return to Terminal Configuration Menu m Figure 44 Terminal Data Rate Menu 5 From the Terminal Data Rate Menu select the desired baud rate The default is 115200 bps Note If you are managing the chassis from a local management session your session ends To resume managing the chassis change the baud rate of your terminal or terminal emulator program 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file return to the Configuration menu and select Save System and All Line Card Configurations To set the baud rate of the Console port from the web browser windows 1 Select Configuration from the menu bar 2 If the System tab is not selected select it The System tab is shown in Figure 23 on page 83 w Click Edit in the Terminal Setting section T In the Terminal Setting pop up window select a new baud rate from the pull down menu 5 Click Update 6 To save your changes in the master configuration file select the Files tab in the Configuration window and click Save System Configuration and All Cards Configurations and Apply AT S73 and AT S99
302. to copy settings for the chassis slots and sends the configuration settings to those AT CM Line Card that are installed in slots where auto copy is enabled 285 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files During this process which takes about two minutes to complete the management card will be unresponsive to commands 6 To resume managing the chassis start a new management session 7 If the chassis has two management cards reinstall the standby card After the standby card has initialized its management software the active management card automatically sends the new master configuration file to the standby card over the backplane of the chassis 286 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Software Programs The following table lists the factory default settings for the AT S99 Management Software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card Table 35 Default Settings for the AT S99 Management Software Settings Default IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Disabled Name None Contact None Location None 10 100Base TX Port Auto Negotiation Activity Monitor Disabled Network Time Protocol Client Disabled Maximum Temperature Threshold 60 C Auto copy Set Per Slot Disabled Community Strings Get Community String public Set Community String private Trap Community String public Omega Manager Password
303. ture 41c 3 3V Power 3 2V 5V Power 4 9 V 12V Power 0 0 V Fan Status Not Present Fan 1 Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off RPSB Not Present Temperature HG 3 3V Power ov 5V Power ov 12V Power ov Fan Status Not Present Fan 1 Speed Off Fan2 Speed Off Figure 47 Chassis Diagnostics Tab AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Pinging Network Devices Menus Web Browser The procedure in this section is used to test for live connections between the 10 100Base TX port on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and other network devices The management card transmits Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo requests from the 10 100Base TX port and reports the results of the ping on the screen You might perform this procedure if the management card is experiencing a problem communicating with another network device such as a syslog server or a TFTP server The system requirements for this test are described in Access to Your Network on page 28 To ping a network device from the menus 1 From the Main Menu select Administration to display the menu in Figure 28 on page 98 2 Select Ping a Remote System The following message is displayed Please enter Station IP Address to ping 3 Enter the IP address of the network device you want the management card to ping The management card sends three ping echo requests and displays the results on the screen 4 Toreturn to the Administration Menu press any key This manage
304. turn to Main Menu Figure 20 Configuration Menu 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 2d System Configuration Menu System Name System Clock Configuration Omega Options IP Parameters SNMPv3 Configurations TFTP Image Download Configuration Terminal Configuration Temperature Threshold Configuration S Return to Main Menu X Figure 21 System Configuration Menu AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 3 From the System Configuration Menu select IP Parameters to display the IP Parameters Menu shown in Figure 22 e IP Parameters Menu CN Converteon IP address 10 0 0 1 Subnet mask 255 255 252 0 Gateway address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Manager address 0 0 0 0 Get community string public Set community string private Trap community string public Location california USA Contact Allied Telesis gt Disable DHCP Enable DHCP X Return to System Configuration Menu Figure 22 IP Parameters Menu 4 To assign a static IP address configuration to the card enter the values in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields Here are the guidelines for assigning a static IP address configuration The values have to be entered in this format xxx xxx XXX XXX The DHCP client has to be disabled To delete a value without assigning a new value
305. tware User s Guide OAM loopback tests are used to test the quality of the fiber optic connection that serves as the link between two AT CM Line Cards or between an AT CM Line Card and another OAM compliant device Test packets are exchanged by the line cards over the fiber optic link on Port A The test packets are generated by the local line card in the Converteon chassis that has the AT CV5M02 Management Card The remote line card returns the test packets over the same fiber optic connection As the local line card receives its original test packets it checks for lost packets and for packets with errors and displays the results in statistics counters Figure 6 illustrates a loopback test between two AT CM Line Cards The test packets are generated by the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis at the central office and are returned by the line card in the AT CV1000 Chassis at a remote site AT CM Line Card in Remote AT CV1000 Chassis Test Packets AT CV5000 Chassis ka as and AT CV5MO2 E Management Card a ae qqqqR qa c lets oe e e lets ieu ligit Be o GS Be ee gia Ta E CB e e c e e o e e 8 e 3 AT CM Line Card Figure 6 Loopback Test For instructions refer to Performing an OAM Loopback Test on page 2
306. u select System Configuration to display the menu in Figure 21 on page 80 3 From the System Configuration Menu select Omega Options to display the Omega Options Menu in Figure 25 i Omega Options Menu ON System Name Manager Password Operator Password Timeout 10 gt Local Omega Enabled Disable Local Omega gt Remote Omega Enabled No Remote Omega V Return to System Configuration Menu E Figure 25 Omega Options Menu AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 4 Configure the parameters as needed The options are described in Table 7 Table 7 Omega Options Menu Parameter Description System Name This parameter assigns a name to the management card The name can have up to 40 characters Spaces and special characters are permitted To delete an existing name without entering a new name press the space bar once Manager Password These parameters are used to set the manager and operator Operator Password passwords Passwords can have 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters of the letters A to Z in uppercase and lowercase as well as the numbers 1 to 9 Passwords are case sensitive and should not contain special characters such as spaces asterisks or exclamation points The default passwords are friend for the manager account and operator for the operator account The password is displayed as a series of asterisks To delete the current password without assigni
307. u window shown in Figure 29 a Event Log Menu Converteon Display Event Log Clear Event Log aerem to Administration Menu Figure 29 Event Log Menu 3 From the Event Log Menu select Display Event Log An example of the event log is shown in Figure 30 The messages are displayed from oldest to newest 98 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide 12 10 07 11 32 02 12 10 07 11 32 05 12 10 07 11 32 10 12 10 07 11 32 15 Total Events 8 Displaying 1 to 4 ModuleName Message REPORT Region21 Line Card 2 Port 1 online REPORT Region21 Line Card 2 Port 2 Online REPORT Region22 Line Card 3 Port 1 Online REPORT Region22 Line Card 3 Port 2 Online N Next Page P Previous Page F First Page L Last Page R Return Converteon E Event Log Figure 30 Event Log The columns in the event log are described in Table 8 Table 8 Event Log Format Column Definition Date This column displays the dates of the events Time This column displays the times of the events Classification This unlabeled column displays the classifications of the events An event s classification can be REPORT or CLEAR A report signals an event s occurrence while a clear signifies the resolution of a prior event For example if a chassis operating temperature were to exceed the temperature threshold the management module would mark the event s occurrence by entering a High Tem
308. ue equals the specified rate limit When you see multiple values in the Specified Rate Limit Kbps column and one value in the Average Rate Limit Kbps column all of the specified values result in the same average rate limit 297 Appendix C Packet Rate Limiting on the AT CM2KOS Line Card 298 Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 70 through 556 Same 557 and 558 558 559 through 566 Same 567 and 568 568 569 through 574 Same 575 and 576 576 577 through 581 Same 582 and 583 583 584 through 587 Same 588 and 589 589 590 through 592 Same 593 and 594 594 595 through 598 Same 599 and 600 600 601 through 602 Same 604 and 604 604 605 through 607 607 608 and 609 609 610 through 611 Same 612 and 613 613 614 through 615 Same 616 and 617 617 618 through 619 Same 620 and 621 621 622 through 623 Same 624 and 625 625 626 through 627 Same AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Table 37 Rate Limits Equivalents Continued Specified Rate Limit Average Rate Limit Kbps Result Kbps 628 and 629 629 630 Same 631 and 632 632 633 through 634 Same 635 and 636 636 637 Same 638 and 639 639 640 Same 641 and 642 642 643 through 644 Same 645 and 646 646 647 Same 648 and 6
309. up Table ssessseeseeeeneeeen nenne nennen enne nennen nnne nnn aaea eeinetan kasaa nnne 258 Configuring the SNMPv3 Notify Table essen enne nnren enn nen nri enr e nennen nnns innen nnne nene 261 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Address Table ssssssseeeee eene enne nennen nren nnne enne nanan nnne 264 Configuring the SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table enne nen nnne 267 Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files ssssee mener nnne nens 271 uuu D 272 Configuring th TATP Client i iere ed oH ORI HT aa ae naaa a a a aa ERE etre Ren A ERR 273 Downloading New Management Software Using TFTP ssssssssenee nene nne enn enne nennen 275 Downloading New Management Software Using XMODEM ssssseeeeeen eene rennen ennemi nennen 279 Uploading the Master Configuration File from a Management Card sssseeeneeen eene 281 Menus ov ei A eee ee ee i ee 281 Web BrowSe d 282 Downloading the Master Configuration File to a Management Card sse emen 284 Men s ineat teret e ice ne um eset diete e odeto ee teque Movie heated i a lea tue tele een Pe Hagin eade ce expe dtaa 284 Web Browser D n 285 Appendix A Default Settings for the Management Software Programs
310. ure SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Menu sssseeeeeneen mener enne 268 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Tab ssssssssssssseeeeeeeneeen nennen nene nennen nemen nre nes 268 TFTP Image Download Configuration essssseeeeeeenennenn emen nnne nennen nnne nennen 273 Image Download Me nu ree rei eire eme rk Eme LEER de Rr eC d e Rd Reden Re rea died 276 Image Download via TFTP Menu sssssesee eene unntatt tunt En enn en nei enne et rrr en nne ern enne nnns 276 Image Download via TF TP Menu cesta ccevsenoescendeociecudbeseuachesccncedanendgucitebeod qneveuedusidcbecdanecceneessnens 280 Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP sssssseeeeeeeneen em nene errem nne nnne 281 alor aaeaiaan 282 Rate Limit Input vs Hardware Configured Values sessseeeenmnenem eene enne 297 11 Figures Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 GONVEMEOM SMASSIS s eter save nite eue on LM m Mm tO MI HELM LES Mec AT CM Media Converter Lin
311. v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 5 AT CM202 v2 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 6 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 7 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 8 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 9 AT CM212A 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 10 AT CV102 11 AT CV102 12 AT CV102 13 AT CV102 14 AT CV102 15 Not Inserted 16 Not Inserted 17 Not inserted e 18 Not Inserted S any key to continue E Figure 69 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window The columns in the window are described in Table 18 Table 18 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description Module This column displays the slot numbers and the model names of the cards App Ver This column displays the version numbers of the management software on the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CM Line Cards This column does not apply to the AT CV Line Cards because they do not have management software 165 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 166 Table 18 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description BootLdr This column displays the version numbers of the Ver bootloader files on the AT CM Line Cards This column does not apply to the AT CV5M02 Management Card and the AT CV Line Cards because they do not have bootloader files Web Browser To view the version numbers of the management software and bootloader files on the line cards from the we
312. ve state and automatically transmits its master configuration file to the standby card O If you install a second management card in an operating chassis the active management card waits for the new card to initialize its management software and enter the standby state Afterwards it transmits its master configuration file to the new card If you install a second management card during a local management session you ll be able to watch the process as status messages similar to those in Figure 1 are displayed on your screen Active Management Card AT CV5M02 founded in Slot 2 Standby Management Card AT CV5M02 founded in Slot 5 gt Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please Wait Not Ready gt Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please Wait Not Ready gt Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please Wait Not Ready gt Waiting for Standby to be Ready Please Wait Ready C Copy Configuration to Standby Please wait 078 Succeeded 2 32 Figure 1 Updating the Master Configuration File on a Standby Card AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide The incrementing number at the bottom of the screen is the ID number of the parameter setting the active card is transmitting to the standby card All parameter settings have unique ID numbers The number can be ignored After the management card has sent the entire master configuration file it displays Succeed
313. ve the same UART settings In fact they ll have different settings because one of the cards will probably reside in the AT CV5000 Chassis with a management card and the other at a remote site in a chassis that does not have a management card Figure 82 illustrates the idea of the UART setting It shows a deployment of two AT CM70S Line Cards and their UART settings The UART setting of the line card in the AT CV5000 Chassis is set to UART backplane mode so that the T1 E1 ports on the card can be managed through the management card in the chassis In contrast the UART setting of the card at the remote site is set to UART console mode so that the T1 E1 ports can be managed through the card s Console port at the site If the card at the remote site had a UART setting of UART backplane mode you would have to remove the card from the chassis and install it into another unit AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide that had a management card whenever you wanted to configure the T1 E1 ports AT CM70S Line Card Set to the UART Local Console Mode AT CV1203 Chassis eo eo ee FT Fe eo eo eo eo eo eo Joo Jee ee AT CV5000 Chassis ES eae with a Management TT 8 Card 4899494449 us 4 4 4 4 AT CM70S Line Card Set t
314. ware Allied Telesis may periodically release new versions of the AT S73 Management Software for the AT CM Media Converter Line Cards New software can be downloaded to remote media converter line cards through the OAM based remote peer management feature This saves you from having to visit the remote sites where the line cards are located when you want to update their management software Figure 5 illustrates this feature The remote AT CM Line Card receives a new version of the AT S73 Management Software over the fiber optic link on Port A from its line card counterpart in the managed chassis in this case the AT CV5000 Chassis The file is downloaded through the management card from a local management session using XMODEM or from a remote TFTP server For instructions refer to Chapter 11 Uploading and Downloading Files on page 271 AT CM Line Card in remote AT CV1000 Chassis New AT S73 Management gt Software AT CV5000 Chassis PEP PEP EPA EEE PEPE rr and AT CV5M02 i SSSSEEESESEESSS Management Card aaeaaeaaeeaaa amp Local XMODEM OR Remote TFTP download server download Figure 5 Downloading New AT S73 Management Software to Remote AT CM Line Cards OAM Loopback Tests AT S73 and AT S99 Management Sof
315. windows 1 Select Administration from the menu bar 2 Select the Diagnostics tab 3 Select the Remote Linecard Image Information tab shown in Figure 81 on page 189 General Event Log Syslog Diagnostics DN D uu cM Local Module Remote Module Application Version Bootloader Version 1 AT CV5MO02 lt 2 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 3 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 4 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 5 AT CM202 AT CM202 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 6 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212B 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 7 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212B 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 8 AT CM212A 1 AT CM212B 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 9 AT CM2124 1 AT CM212B 1 v3 0 0 v1 7 0 10 AT CV102 No Support No Support No Support 11 AT CV102 No Support No Support No Support 12 AT CV102 Mo Support No Support No Support 13 AT CV102 No Support No Support No Support 14 AT CV102 Mo Support No Support No Support 15 Not Inserted 16 Not Inserted 17 Not Inserted 18 Not Inserted AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Administration Figure 81 Remote Linecard Image Information Tab The information in this window is for viewing purposes only The columns in the window are described in Table 23 Table 23 Line Card Module Software Image Version Window Row Description Local This column displays the slot numbers and the model Module names of the local AT CM Line Cards in the chassis that has the management card
316. witch Setting Line Card Configuration X Return to Module Status and Configuration E Figure 53 Module Configuration Menu Media Converter Line Card The columns in the table are defined in Table 15 Table 15 Module Configuration Menu Column Description Module This field displays the model name of the line card Names of newer versions of the cards include suffixes like v2 139 Chapter 5 Configuring AT CM and AT CV Media Converter Line Cards 140 Table 15 Module Configuration Menu Column Description Port This column identifies the port types Link This column displays the states of the links between the ports and the network devices connected to the ports The possible states are O Online The port has established a link to a network device O Offline The port is not connected to a network device or has not established a link to a device Speed This column displays the current speeds of the ports in Mbps For a port to display a speed it has to be linked to a network device Mode This column displays the duplex modes of the ports For a port to display a duplex mode it has to be linked to a network device The possible duplex modes for the ports are o Full Full duplex mode o Half Half duplex mode 3 Select the port you want to configure You can configure only one port at a time This displays the Port Management Menu shown in Figure 54 a Port Manag
317. with an IP address configuration is vulnerable to unauthorized access from an intruder with an SNMP program you should change the card s SNMP community strings to protect the card and the chassis If an intruder were to learn the IP address and the community strings of the management card he could use an SNMP application program to gain access to the card without having to know the password to the manager account The IP address configuration of the management card can be assigned manually or since the management card has a DHCP client from a DHCP server on your network To assign the management card an IP address configuration and to change the SNMP community strings 1 From the Main Menu select Configuration 2 From the Configuration Menu select System Configuration 3 From the System Configuration Menu select IP Parameters to display the IP Parameters Menu 4 To manually assign an IP address configuration to the management card enter values for the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address parameters When entering the values observe the following guidelines O The values have to be entered in this format xxx xxx xxX XXX Oo The DHCP client has to be disabled o To delete a value without assigning a new value enter 0 0 0 0 Setting the Date and Time AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide O A default gateway address is needed if the management card will be communicating with a network device lik
318. word is operator Usernames and passwords are case sensitive After you log on the Chassis View in Figure 12 is displayed For a description of the view refer to Displaying the Status of the Line Cards on page 128 3 To end a management session click Log Out in the menu bar You should always exit from a management session when you finish managing a chassis This is to prevent blocking future management sessions and to protect the management card and line cards from unauthorized changes Note If you close your web browser application without logging out the management session remains active and all further management is blocked until the console timer times out 62 AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide AV Module Status amp Configuration Remote Module Status amp Configuration r Administration Image Download Configuration Management Card Redundancy Log Out Allied Telesis AT S99 Converteon Web Management Module Status amp Configuration Chassis View Menu View 211 2 2 AT CY5M02 AT CM202 AT CM202 e e e PWR ROY FLT 3108NO2 ror LIU eo ojo o o SML ML OAM SML ML DAM T x cru RESET 78 s89 s09 768 s68 s68 9 amp AT CM202 AT CM202 AT TERR R EM212A 1 AT dra ja CM212A 1 A C 102 AT C 102 LK LK g i B ris e e LK FD LK FD z 9 nov EIU nov 2x nov md 2
319. y disrupt the network operations of the AT CM Line Cards in the chassis The parameter settings may change for those line cards that reside in chassis slots where the auto copy feature is activated in the new master configuration file To download the master configuration file to a management card from the menus 1 If the chassis has two AT CV5M02 Management Cards remove the standby card From the Main Menu select Configuration The Configuration Menu is shown in Figure 20 on page 80 From the Configuration Menu select Configuration File Upload Download with TFTP to display the menu in Figure 129 on page 281 Select Download Configuration File to Management Card This prompt is displayed TFTP Server IP Address gt _ Enter the IP address of the TFTP server This prompt is displayed Configuration File Name gt _ Enter the filename of the configuration file on the TFTP server Be sure to include the extension cfg This prompt is displayed Ready to download configuration file through TFTP warning During Download Configuration Management activ ity is disabled 284 Web Browser AT S73 and AT S99 Management Software User s Guide Do TFTP download now Yes or No 6 Type Y to start the download This prompt is displayed Downloading Configuration file through TFTP please wait After receiving the new file the management card does the following o Writes the file to flash memory CD Reboots and

User's Guide - Allied Telesis

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents